A33 Ec

User Manual: ec

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 560 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION
EC
CONTENTS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ....................................7
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................7
PRECAUTIONS .............................................................14
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR
BAG″and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″.............14
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of Engine ......................................................14
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ..................15
Precautions................................................................16
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................17
PREPARATION .............................................................18
Special Service Tools ................................................18
Commercial Service Tools.........................................18
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
SYSTEM.........................................................................20
Engine Control Component Parts Location...............20
Circuit Diagram..........................................................24
System Diagram ........................................................25
Vacuum Hose Drawing ..............................................26
System Chart.............................................................27
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION...............................................28
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .......................28
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ..................................30
Air Conditioning Cut Control......................................31
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed)........................................................................32
Evaporative Emission System...................................32
Positive Crankcase Ventilation ..................................35
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ...................................36
Fuel Pressure Release..............................................36
Fuel Pressure Check.................................................37
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check ................................37
Injector .......................................................................38
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..........40
Idle Air Volume Learning ...........................................41
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION...............................................................44
Introduction ................................................................44
Two Trip Detection Logic...........................................44
Emission-related Diagnostic Information...................45
NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System -
NATS) ........................................................................60
Malfunction Indicator (MI)..........................................60
OBD System Operation Chart (Models with Euro-
OBD System).............................................................64
CONSULT-II ...............................................................70
Generic Scan Tool (GST) ..........................................84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................86
Introduction ................................................................86
Work Flow..................................................................88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION...........90
Basic Inspection.........................................................90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION.............................................................103
DTC Inspection Priority Chart..................................103
Fail-safe Chart .........................................................104
Symptom Matrix Chart.............................................105
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................109
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................ 111
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................114
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE ..122
Description...............................................................122
Testing Condition .....................................................122
Inspection Procedure...............................................122
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................123
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT.....................................................................126
Description...............................................................126
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................126
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........127
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................127
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)......134
Component Description ...........................................134
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................134
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................134
Possible Cause........................................................135
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................135
Wiring Diagram........................................................137
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................138
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR ......................................................................141
Component Description ...........................................141
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................141
Possible Cause........................................................141
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................141
Wiring Diagram........................................................143
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................144
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT).......................................146
Component Description ...........................................146
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................146
Possible Cause........................................................147
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................147
Wiring Diagram........................................................148
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................149
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........151
Description...............................................................151
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................151
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................152
Possible Cause........................................................152
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................152
Wiring Diagram........................................................154
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................155
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1
(FRONT) (CIRCUIT).....................................................158
Component Description ...........................................158
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................158
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................158
Possible Cause........................................................159
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................159
Overall Function Check ...........................................160
Wiring Diagram........................................................161
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................163
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1
(FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING) .....................168
Component Description ...........................................168
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................168
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................168
Possible Cause........................................................169
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................169
Overall Function Check ...........................................170
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................170
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1
(FRONT) (RICH SHIFT MONITORING) ......................176
Component Description ...........................................176
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................176
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................176
Possible Cause........................................................177
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................177
Overall Function Check ...........................................178
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................178
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1
(FRONT) (RESPONSE MONITORING).......................184
Component Description ...........................................184
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................184
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................184
Possible Cause........................................................185
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................185
Overall Function Check ...........................................186
Wiring Diagram........................................................187
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................189
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1
(FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)........................................197
Component Description ...........................................197
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................197
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................197
Possible Cause........................................................198
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................198
Wiring Diagram........................................................199
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................201
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1
HEATER (FRONT).......................................................205
Description...............................................................205
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................205
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................205
Possible Cause........................................................205
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................206
Wiring Diagram........................................................207
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................209
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2
(REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING)...................212
Component Description ...........................................212
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................212
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................212
Possible Cause........................................................213
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................213
Overall Function Check ...........................................214
Wiring Diagram........................................................216
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................218
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-2
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2
(REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING) .................223
Component Description ...........................................223
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................223
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................223
Possible Cause........................................................224
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................224
Overall Function Check ...........................................225
Wiring Diagram........................................................227
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................229
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2
(REAR) (RESPONSE MONITORING).........................234
Component Description ...........................................234
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................234
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................234
Possible Cause........................................................235
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................235
Overall Function Check ...........................................236
Wiring Diagram........................................................238
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................240
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2
(REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)..........................................245
Component Description ...........................................245
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................245
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................245
Possible Cause........................................................246
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................246
Overall Function Check ...........................................246
Wiring Diagram........................................................248
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................250
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2
HEATER (REAR).........................................................254
Description...............................................................254
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................254
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................254
Possible Cause........................................................254
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................255
Wiring Diagram........................................................256
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................258
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN) .................261
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................261
Possible Cause........................................................261
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................261
Wiring Diagram........................................................263
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................265
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH) ..................269
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................269
Possible Cause........................................................269
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................269
Wiring Diagram........................................................271
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................273
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE
SENSOR ......................................................................276
Component Description ...........................................276
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................276
Possible Cause........................................................276
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................277
Wiring Diagram........................................................278
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................279
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER
MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE ...............281
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................281
Possible Cause........................................................281
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................282
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................282
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) ...........................289
Component Description ...........................................289
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................289
Possible Cause........................................................289
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................289
Wiring Diagram........................................................291
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................292
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CKPS) (POS)..............................................................295
Component Description ...........................................295
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................295
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................295
Possible Cause........................................................295
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................296
Wiring Diagram........................................................297
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................298
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CMPS) (PHASE).........................................................303
Component Description ...........................................303
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................303
Possible Cause........................................................303
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................303
Wiring Diagram........................................................305
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................306
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE
WAY CATALYST FUNCTION .....................................309
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................309
Possible Cause........................................................309
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................310
Overall Function Check ...........................................310
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................311
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-3
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT).................314
Description...............................................................314
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................314
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................315
Possible Cause........................................................315
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................315
Wiring Diagram........................................................316
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................317
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) .........320
Component Description ...........................................320
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................320
Possible Cause........................................................320
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................320
Overall Function Check ...........................................321
Wiring Diagram........................................................322
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................323
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) -
AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE ...............324
Description...............................................................324
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................325
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................325
Possible Cause........................................................325
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................325
Wiring Diagram........................................................327
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................328
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION
SWITCH .......................................................................333
Component Description ...........................................333
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................333
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................333
Possible Cause........................................................333
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................334
Overall Function Check ...........................................334
Wiring Diagram........................................................336
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................337
DTC P0605 ECM .........................................................341
Component Description ...........................................341
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................341
Possible Cause........................................................341
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................341
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................342
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................344
Description...............................................................344
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................345
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................345
Possible Cause........................................................345
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................345
Wiring Diagram........................................................347
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................348
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
(OVERHEAT) ...............................................................351
System Description..................................................351
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................352
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................352
Possible Cause........................................................353
Overall Function Check ...........................................353
Wiring Diagram........................................................355
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................357
Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................368
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL...................................369
Component Description ...........................................369
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................369
Possible Cause........................................................369
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................369
Wiring Diagram........................................................371
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................374
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CKPS) (REF) ..............................................................380
Component Description ...........................................380
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................380
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................380
Possible Cause........................................................381
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................381
Wiring Diagram........................................................383
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................384
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CKPS) (POS) (COG) ..................................................387
Component Description ...........................................387
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................387
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................387
Possible Cause........................................................387
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................388
Wiring Diagram........................................................389
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................390
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION
LINE .............................................................................395
Component Description ...........................................395
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................395
Possible Cause........................................................395
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................395
Wiring Diagram........................................................396
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................397
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP)
SWITCH .......................................................................398
Component Description ...........................................398
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-4
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................398
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................398
Possible Cause........................................................398
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................398
Overall Function Check ...........................................399
Wiring Diagram........................................................400
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................401
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR ............................404
Component Description ...........................................404
Wiring Diagram........................................................405
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................406
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR ....................410
Component Description ...........................................410
Wiring Diagram........................................................411
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................412
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)...................415
Component Description ...........................................415
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................415
Wiring Diagram........................................................416
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................418
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)...424
Description...............................................................424
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................424
Wiring Diagram........................................................425
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................427
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR).....................431
Component Description ...........................................431
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................431
Wiring Diagram........................................................432
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................434
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR).....440
Description...............................................................440
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................440
Wiring Diagram........................................................441
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................443
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR ....................447
Component Description ...........................................447
Wiring Diagram........................................................448
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................449
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS)
(POS)............................................................................451
Component Description ...........................................451
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................451
Wiring Diagram........................................................452
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................453
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................459
Description...............................................................459
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................459
Wiring Diagram........................................................460
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................461
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)..............................465
Component Description ...........................................465
Wiring Diagram........................................................466
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................467
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) - AUXILIARY
AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE....................................469
Description...............................................................469
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................470
Wiring Diagram........................................................471
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................472
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH ................477
Component Description ...........................................477
Wiring Diagram........................................................478
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................479
A/T COMMUNICATION LINE......................................482
System Description..................................................482
Wiring Diagram........................................................483
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................484
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE..........................................................................486
Description...............................................................486
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................487
Wiring Diagram........................................................488
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................489
IGNITION SIGNAL.......................................................495
Component Description ...........................................495
Wiring Diagram........................................................496
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................499
A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE ................506
Component Description ...........................................506
Wiring Diagram........................................................507
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................508
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ............510
Component Description ...........................................510
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................510
Wiring Diagram........................................................511
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................512
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
(VIAS)...........................................................................517
Description...............................................................517
Wiring Diagram........................................................519
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................520
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-5
INJECTOR ...................................................................523
Component Description ...........................................523
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................523
Wiring Diagram........................................................524
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................525
START SIGNAL...........................................................529
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................529
Wiring Diagram........................................................530
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................531
FUEL PUMP.................................................................533
System Description..................................................533
Component Description ...........................................533
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................533
Wiring Diagram........................................................534
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................535
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT.......539
System Description..................................................539
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................539
Wiring Diagram........................................................540
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................541
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.........543
Component Description ...........................................543
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode........................................................................543
Wiring Diagram........................................................544
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................545
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ......................548
Description...............................................................548
Wiring Diagram........................................................549
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................550
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.....................................552
Wiring Diagram........................................................552
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................554
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ..............................558
Wiring Diagram........................................................558
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......559
Fuel Pressure Regulator..........................................559
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing................................559
Mass Air Flow Sensor..............................................559
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ......................559
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (front) .................559
Fuel Pump ...............................................................559
IACV-AAC Valve ......................................................559
Injector .....................................................................559
Resistor....................................................................559
Throttle Position Sensor ..........................................560
Calculated Load Value.............................................560
Intake Air Temperature Sensor................................560
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater (rear)..................560
Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) ..........................560
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor ...............................560
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .......................560
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
EC-6
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
NFEC0001
Check if the vehicle is a model with Euro-OBD (E-OBD) system or not by the “Type approval number” on the
identification plate. Refer to GI-40, “IDENTIFICATION PLATE”.
Type approval number Model
Available With Euro-OBD system
Not available (blank). Without Euro-OBD system
MODELS WITH EURO-OBD SYSTEM
NFEC0001S03
Alphabetical Index for DTC
NFEC0001S0301
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 Reference page
Unable to access ECM — EC-104
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 EC-141
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-144
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-150
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-156
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-162
A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 EC-395
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-128
CMP SEN/CIRCUIT P0340 EC-303
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 EC-333
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 P0115 EC-146
CKP SENSOR (COG) P1336 EC-387
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 EC-295
CKP SEN (REF)/CIRC P1335 EC-380
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 EC-281
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 EC-281
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 EC-281
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 EC-281
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 EC-281
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 EC-281
ECM P0605 EC-341
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-139
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 EC-351
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 P0171 EC-261
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2 P0174 EC-261
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 P0172 EC-269
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2 P0175 EC-269
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 EC-276
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 EC-158
HO2S1 (B1) P0131 EC-168
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
EC-7
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 Reference page
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 EC-176
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-184
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-197
HO2S1 (B2) P0150 EC-158
HO2S1 (B2) P0151 EC-168
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 EC-176
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 EC-184
HO2S1 (B2) P0154 EC-197
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 EC-205
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0155 EC-205
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 EC-212
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 EC-223
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-234
HO2S2 (B1) P0140 EC-245
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 EC-212
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 EC-223
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-234
HO2S2 (B2) P0160 EC-245
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 EC-254
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0161 EC-254
IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 EC-324
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 EC-289
L/PRES SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-176
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 P0100 EC-134
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 EC-281
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615*2 EL-291
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 —
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-201
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 EC-398
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-122
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 EC-314
SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 P0750 AT-182
SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 P0755 AT-187
SWIRL CONT SOL/V P1131 EC-344
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 AT-171
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 P1705 AT-192
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-8
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 Reference page
TRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 P0120 EC-151
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 EC-309
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 EC-309
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 P0500 EC-320
VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*4 P0720 AT-134
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II only.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MI illuminates.
*4: The MI illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate bank 1 and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate bank 2.
P No. Index for DTC
NFEC0001S0302
DTC*1 Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
— Unable to access ECM EC-104
P0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED. —
P0100 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 EC-134
P0110 AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-141
P0115 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 EC-146
P0120 THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 EC-151
P0130 HO2S1 (B1) EC-158
P0131 HO2S1 (B1) EC-168
P0132 HO2S1 (B1) EC-176
P0133 HO2S1 (B1) EC-184
P0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-197
P0135 HO2S1 HTR (B1) EC-205
P0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-212
P0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-223
P0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-234
P0140 HO2S2 (B1) EC-245
P0141 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-254
P0150 HO2S1 (B2) EC-158
P0151 HO2S1 (B2) EC-168
P0152 HO2S1 (B2) EC-176
P0153 HO2S1 (B2) EC-184
P0154 HO2S1 (B2) EC-197
P0155 HO2S1 HTR (B2) EC-205
P0157 HO2S2 (B2) EC-212
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-9
DTC*1 Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
P0158 HO2S2 (B2) EC-223
P0159 HO2S2 (B2) EC-234
P0160 HO2S2 (B2) EC-245
P0161 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-254
P0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 EC-261
P0172 FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 EC-269
P0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2 EC-261
P0175 FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2 EC-269
P0180 FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-276
P0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-281
P0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-281
P0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE EC-281
P0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE EC-281
P0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE EC-281
P0305 CYL 5 MISFIRE EC-281
P0306 CYL 6 MISFIRE EC-281
P0325 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-289
P0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-295
P0340 CMP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-303
P0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-309
P0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EC-309
P0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-314
P0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 EC-320
P0505 IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC EC-324
P0510 CLOSED TP SW/CIRC EC-333
P0605 ECM EC-341
P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-122
P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-128
P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*4 AT-134
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-139
P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-144
P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-150
P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-156
P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-162
P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-171
P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-176
P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 AT-182
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-10
DTC*1 Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 AT-187
P1131 SWIRL CONT SOL/V EC-344
P1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-351
P1335 CKP SEN (REF)/CIRC EC-380
P1336 CKP SENSOR (COG) EC-387
P1605 A/T DIAG COMM LINE EC-395
P1610 - P1615*2 NATS MALFUNCTION EL-291
P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 AT-192
P1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-398
P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-201
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II only.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MI illuminates.
*4: The MI illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate bank 1 and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate bank 2.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-11
MODELS WITHOUT EURO-OBD SYSTEM
=NFEC0001S04
Alphabetical Index for DTC
NFEC0001S0401
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*1
Unable to access ECM — — EC-104
CMP SEN/CIRCUIT P0340 0340 EC-303
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0115 0115 EC-146
CKP SENSOR (COG) P1336 1336 EC-387
CKP SEN (REF) CIRC P1335 1335 EC-380
ECM P0605 0605 EC-341
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-351
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 0130 EC-158
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 1320 EC-369
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 0325 EC-289
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 0100 EC-134
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 — EL-291
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 —
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED. No DTC Flashing*2 EC-61
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC P0120 0120 EC-151
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” indicates bank 1 and “-B2” indicates bank 2.
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
*2: While engine is running.
P No. Index for DTC
NFEC0001S0402
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*1
— — Unable to access ECM EC-104
No DTC Flashing*2 NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED. EC-61
P0000 0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED. —
P0100 0100 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-134
P0115 0115 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC EC-146
P0120 0120 THRTL POS SEN/CIRC EC-151
P0130 0130 HO2S1 (B1) EC-158
P0325 0325 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-289
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-12
DTC Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*1
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-303
P0605 0605 ECM EC-341
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-351
P1320 1320 IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY EC-369
P1335 1335 CKP SEN (REF)/CIRC EC-380
P1336 1336 CKP SENSOR (COG) EC-387
P1610 - P1615 — NATS MALFUNCTION EL-291
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” indicates bank 1 and “-B2” indicates bank 2.
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
*2: While engine is running.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
EC-13
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR
BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
NFEC0871
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL A33 is as follows (The compo-
sition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):
+For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
+For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring
harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
+To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
+Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section.
+Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified with yellow harness connector (and with
yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of Engine
NFEC0003
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MI) to warn the driver
of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
+Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MI to light up.
+Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MI to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
+Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL section,
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
+Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MI to light up due to the short circuit.
+Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM before
returning the vehicle to the customer.
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EC-14
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
NFEC0004
SEF242XC
PRECAUTIONS
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
EC-15
SEF289H
Precautions
NFEC0005
+Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect nega-
tive battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the
ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if
ignition switch is turned off.
SEF908W
+When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown at left.
SEF291H
+When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
MEF040D
+Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Ref-
erence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions
properly. Refer to EC-114.
SAT652J
+After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall
Function Check” should be a good result if the repair is
completed.
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
EC-16
SEF348N
+When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
+Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
SEF099WA
+Regarding model A33, “Bank 1 (B1)” indicates cylinders
number 1, 3, 5 and “Bank 2 (B2)” indicates cylinders num-
ber 2, 4, 6 as shown in the figure.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
NFEC0006
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
+GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
+EL-9, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
+GI-32, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
+GI-21, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
EC-17
Special Service Tools
NFEC0007
Tool number
Tool name Description
KV10117100
Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) wrench
Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) wrench
NT379
Loosening or tightening front and heated oxygen
sensor 2 (rear)s with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
KV10117600
Fuel pressure check
adapter
NT777
Checking fuel pressure with pressure gauge
Commercial Service Tools
NFEC0008
Tool name Description
Fuel filler cap adapter
NT653
Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
Socket wrench
NT705
Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
NT778
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-seize
lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm dia. with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia
Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm dia. with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania
Oxygen Sensor
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
EC-18
Tool name Description
Anti-seize lubricant
(Permatex
TM
133AR or
equivalent meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-907)
NT779
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
EC-19
Engine Control Component Parts Location
NFEC0009
SEC121C
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location
EC-20
SEF981X
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
EC-21
SEC122C
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
EC-22
SEF982X
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
EC-23
Circuit Diagram
NFEC0010
MEC211D
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
EC-24
System Diagram
NFEC0011
SEC123C
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Diagram
EC-25
Vacuum Hose Drawing
NFEC0012
SEC124C
Refer to “System Diagram”, EC-25 for Vacuum Control System.
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Vacuum Hose Drawing
EC-26
System Chart
NFEC0013
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)
+Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
+Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
+Mass air flow sensor
+Engine coolant temperature sensor
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
+Ignition switch
+Throttle position sensor
+Closed throttle position switch *3
+Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
+Air conditioner switch
+Knock sensor
+Intake air temperature sensor
+Absolute pressure sensor
+Battery voltage
+Power steering oil pressure switch
+Vehicle speed sensor
+Fuel tank temperature sensor *1
+Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
+Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) *2
+TCM (Transmission control module)
+Refrigerant pressure sensor
+Electrical load
Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Injectors
Electronic ignition system Power transistor
Idle air control system IACV-AAC valve
Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
On board diagnostic system MI (On the instrument panel)
Swirl control valve control Swirl control valve control solenoid
valve
Power valve control VIAS control solenoid valve
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
(front)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(rear)
EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays
*1: These sensors are not used to control the engine system.
*2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*3: This switch will operate in place of the throttle position sensor if the sensor malfunctions.
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Chart
EC-27
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
DESCRIPTION
NFEC0014
Input/Output Signal Chart
NFEC0014S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Fuel injection &
mixture ratio
control Injectors
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Throttle valve idle position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Ignition switch Start signal
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Battery Battery voltage
Absolute pressure sensor Ambient air barometric pressure
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
*1: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.
Basic Multiport Fuel Injection System
NFEC0014S02
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
Various Fuel Injection Increase/Decrease Compensation
NFEC0014S03
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various oper-
ating conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
+During warm-up
+When starting the engine
+During acceleration
+Hot-engine operation
+When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D”
+High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
+During deceleration
+During high engine speed operation
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
EC-28
Mixture Ratio Feedback Control (Closed loop control)
NFEC0014S04
SEF932VA
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission con-
trol. The three way catalyst (Mainfold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
a heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about the
heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), refer to EC-158. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichio-
metric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is located downstream of the three way catalyst (Manifold). Even if the switch-
ing characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
Open Loop Control
NFEC0014S05
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
+Deceleration and acceleration
+High-load, high-speed operation
+Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) or its circuit
+Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) at low engine coolant temperature
+High engine coolant temperature
+During warm-up
+After shifting from “N” to “D”
+When starting the engine
Mixture Ratio Self-learning Control
NFEC0014S06
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front). This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio
as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily con-
trolled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and charac-
teristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This
is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN
compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is
rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
EC-29
Fuel Injection Timing
NFEC0014S07
SEF179U
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
NFEC0014S0701
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
NFEC0014S0702
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
Fuel Shut-off
NFEC0014S08
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System
DESCRIPTION
NFEC0015
Input/Output Signal Chart
NFEC0015S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Ignition timing
control Power transistor
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Throttle valve idle position
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Ignition switch Start signal
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Battery Battery voltage
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
EC-30
System Description
NFEC0015S02
SEF742M
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of
the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Com-
puting this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored
in the ECM.
+At starting
+During warm-up
+At idle
+At low battery voltage
+During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control
DESCRIPTION
NFEC0016
Input/Output Signal Chart
NFEC0016S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
Air conditioner
cut control Air conditioner relay
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch Start signal
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation
System Description
NFEC0016S02
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
+When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
+When cranking the engine.
+At high engine speeds.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Electronic Ignition (EI) System (Cont’d)
EC-31
+When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
+When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
+When engine speed is excessively low.
+When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed)
DESCRIPTION
NFEC0017
Input/Output Signal Chart
NFEC0017S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Fuel cut control Injectors
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-28.
Evaporative Emission System
DESCRIPTION
NFEC0018
SEF988X
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Air Conditioning Cut Control (Cont’d)
EC-32
operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is propor-
tionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
SEF917W
INSPECTION
NFEC0019
EVAP Canister
NFEC0019S01
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B. Blow air through port A orally. Check that air flows
freely through port C with check valve resistance.
2. Block port A. Blow air through port B orally. Check that air flows
freely through port C.
SEF989X
SEF943S
Fuel Tank Vacuum Relief Valve (Built into fuel filler cap)
NFEC0019S03
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.1530 - 0.2001 bar, 0.156 - 0.204
kg/cm
2
, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.4 kPa (–0.0598 to –0.0343 bar, −0.061 to
−0.035 kg/cm
2
, −0.87 to −0.50 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement.
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Volume
Control Solenoid Valve
NFEC0019S05
Refer to EC-314 and EC-459.
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
NFEC0019S06
Refer to EC-276 and EC-447.
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines
NFEC0019S11
1. Visually inspect vapor lines for leaks, cracks, damage, loose
connections, chafing and deterioration.
2. Inspect vacuum relief valve of fuel tank filler cap for clogging,
sticking, etc. Refer to next page.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
EC-33
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
NFEC0020
SEC125C
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
EC-34
SEF372Q
SEF559A
Positive Crankcase Ventilation
DESCRIPTION
NFEC0021
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to con-
duct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold
sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any
blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the
crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose con-
necting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to
draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the
hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all
conditions.
SEC137A
INSPECTION
NFEC0022
PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve
NFEC0022S01
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve ventilation hose
from PCV valve; if the valve is working properly, a hissing noise will
be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be
felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
ET277
PCV Valve Ventilation Hose
NFEC0022S02
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Positive Crankcase Ventilation
EC-35
SEF289XA
SEF036Y
PEF823K
Fuel Pressure Release
NFEC0023
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
line to eliminate danger.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0023S01
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
SEF290XA
SEF037Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
NFEC0023S02
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box.
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
EC-36
SEF030Y
Fuel Pressure Check
NFEC0024
+When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
+Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent
parts.
+Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
+Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
+Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operat-
ing. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Disconnect fuel tube joint between fuel pressure regulator and
injector tube and set fuel pressure check adapter (J44321).
SEF031Y
3. Install pressure gauge to the fuel pressure check adapter as
shown in the figure.
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idling:
With vacuum hose connected
Approximately 235 kPa (2.35 bar, 2.4 kg/cm
2
,34
psi)
With vacuum hose disconnected
Approximately 294 kPa (2.94 bar, 3.0 kg/cm
2
,43
psi)
If results are unsatisfactory, perform Fuel Pressure Regulator
Check.
SEC015C
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check
NFEC0025
1. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum
hose from vacuum gallery.
2. Plug vacuum gallery with a blind cap.
3. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Check
EC-37
SEF718BA
4. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as
vacuum is changed.
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator.
SEF702X
SEF703X
Injector
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NFEC0026
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-18, “TIMING
CHAIN”.
3. Remove fuel tube assemblies in numerical sequence as
shown in the figure at left.
4. Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.
5. Extract fuel injectors straight from fuel tubes.
+Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal.
+Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
+Do not disassemble or adjust fuel injectors.
6. Carefully install O-rings, including the one used with the pres-
sure regulator.
+Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil.
+Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools, fin-
ger nails or clips. Do not expand or twist O-rings. If
stretched, do not insert them into fuel tubes immediately
after stretching.
+Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
7. Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors.
+Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned
with cutouts of clips after installation.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check (Cont’d)
EC-38
SEF704XA
8. Align protrusions of fuel tubes with those of fuel injectors.
Insert fuel injectors straight into fuel tubes.
9. After properly inserting fuel injectors, check to make sure that
fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors,
and that flanges of fuel tubes are engaged with clips.
SEF705X
10. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in numerical
sequence (indicated in the figure at left) and in two stages.
: Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1st stage:
9.3 - 10.8 (1.0 - 1.1, 6.9 - 7.9)
2nd stage:
20.6 - 26.5 (2.1 - 2.7, 16 - 19)
11. Install all parts removed in reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and
fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Injector (Cont’d)
EC-39
SEF058Y
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
NFEC0607
IDLE SPEED
NFEC0607S01
+Using CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF260P
IGNITION TIMING
NFEC0607S02
Any of following two methods may be used.
+Method A
a) Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
b) Check ignition timing.
SEF247Q
+Method B
a) Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
SEF248Q
SEF257P
b) Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to
this wire.
c) Check ignition timing.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
EC-40
SEF311Q
SEF217Z
SEF454Y
SEF455Y
Idle Air Volume Learning
NFEC0642
DESCRIPTION
NFEC0642S01
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air vol-
ume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be
performed under any of the following conditions:
+Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced.
+Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PRE-CONDITIONING
NFEC0642S02
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of
the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are
missed for even a moment.
+Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
+Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99°C (158 - 210°F)
+PNP switch: ON
+Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting
switch to the 1st position to light only small lamps.
+Cooling fan motor: Not operating
+Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
+Vehicle speed: Stopped
+Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi-
cates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive
vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NFEC0642S03
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0642S0301
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing (Cont’d)
EC-41
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITION-
ING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
7. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
8. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
9. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
If “INCMP” is displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the
problem by referring to the NOTE below.
10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed VQ20DE M/T: 675±50 rpm
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
VQ30DE M/T: 625±50 rpm
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing VQ20DE M/T: 9°±5° BTDC
A/T: 9°±5° BTDC (in “P” or ”N” position)
VQ30DE M/T: 15°±5° BTDC
A/T: 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
SEC001C
Without CONSULT-II
NFEC0642S0302
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITION-
ING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown),
then reconnect it within 5 seconds.
8. Wait 20 seconds.
9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the
result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the
problem by referring to the NOTE below.
10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within specifications.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)
EC-42
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed VQ20DE M/T: 675±50 rpm
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
VQ30DE M/T: 625±50 rpm
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing VQ20DE M/T: 9°±5° BTDC
A/T: 9°±5° BTDC (in “P” or ”N” position)
VQ30DE M/T: 15°±5° BTDC
A/T: 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
NOTE:
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully,
proceed as follows:
1) Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2) Check PCV valve operation.
3) Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air
leakage.
4) Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory.
(Refer to Basic Inspection, EC-90.)
5) When the above three items check out OK, engine com-
ponent parts and their installation condition are question-
able. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFI-
CATION VALUE”, EC-122.
6) If any of the following conditions occur after the engine
has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and per-
form “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
+Engine stalls.
+Erroneous idle.
+Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system.
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)
EC-43
Introduction
NFEC0029
MODELSWITHEURO-OBDSYSTEM
NFEC0029S02
TheECMhasanonboarddiagnosticsystemwhichdetectsmalfunctionsrelatedtoenginesensorsoractua-
tors.TheECMalsorecordsvariousemission-relateddiagnosticinformationincluding:
DiagnosticTroubleCode(DTC) Mode3ofISO15031-5
FreezeFramedata Mode2ofISO15031-5
SystemReadinessTest(SRT)code Mode1ofISO15031-5
1stTripDiagnosticTroubleCode(1stTripDTC) Mode7ofISO15031-5
1stTripFreezeFramedata
TestvaluesandTestlimits Mode6ofISO15031-5
CalibrationID Mode9ofISO15031-5
Theaboveinformationcanbecheckedusingprocedureslistedinthetablebelow.
X:Applicable —:Notapplicable
DTC 1sttripDTC FreezeFrame
data 1sttripFreeze
Framedata SRTcode Testvalue
CONSULT-II X X X X X —
GST X X*1 X — X X
*1:1sttripDTCsforself-diagnosesconcerningSRTitemscannotbeshownontheGSTdisplay.
Themalfunctionindicator(MI)ontheinstrumentpanellightsupwhenthesamemalfunctionisdetectedintwo
consecutivetrips(Twotripdetectionlogic),orwhentheECMentersfail-safemode.(RefertoEC-104.)
MODELSWITHOUTEURO-OBDSYSTEM
NFEC0029S01
TheECMhasanonboarddiagnosticsystem,whichdetectsmalfunctionsrelatedtoenginesensorsoractua-
tors.TheECMalsorecordsvariousemission-relateddiagnosticinformationincluding:
DiagnosticTroubleCode(DTC)
FreezeFramedata
1stTripDiagnosticTroubleCode(1stTripDTC)
1stTripFreezeFramedata
Theaboveinformationcanbecheckedusingprocedureslistedinthetablebelow.
X:Applicable —:Notapplicable
DTC 1sttripDTC FreezeFramedata 1sttripFreezeFrame
data
CONSULT-II X X X X
ECM X X*1 — —
*1:WhentheDTCandthe1sttripDTCappearonthedisplaysimultaneously,itisdifficulttoclearlydistinguishonefromtheother.
TwoTripDetectionLogic
NFEC0030
MODELSWITHEURO-OBDSYSTEM
NFEC0030S01
Whenamalfunctionisdetectedforthefirsttime,1sttripDTCand1sttripFreezeFramedataarestoredin
theECMmemory.TheMIwillnotlightupatthisstage<1sttrip>.
Ifthesamemalfunctionisdetectedagainduringthenextdrive,theDTCandFreezeFramedataarestored
intheECMmemory,andtheMIlightsup.TheMIlightsupatthesametimewhentheDTCisstored<2nd
trip>.
The“trip”inthe“TwoTripDetectionLogic”meansadrivingmodeinwhichself-diagnosisisperformedduring
vehicleoperation.SpecificonboarddiagnosticitemswillcausetheECMtolightuporblinktheMI,andstore
DTCandFreezeFramedata,eveninthe1sttrip,asshownbelow.
ONBOARDDIAGNOSTICSYSTEMDESCRIPTION
Introduction
EC-44
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
Items
MI DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
displaying 2nd trip
displaying 1st trip
displaying 2nd trip
displaying
Blinking Lighting
up Blinking Lighting
up
Misfire (Possible three way
catalyst damage)
— DTC: P0300 - P0306 is
being detected
X ————— X —
Misfire (Possible three way
catalyst damage)
— DTC: P0300 - P0306 is
being detected
——X——X——
Fail-safe items (Refer to
EC-104.) — X — — X*1 — X*1 —
Except above — — —X—X X—
*1: Except “ECM”.
MODELS WITHOUT EURO-OBD SYSTEM
NFEC0030S02
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored
in the ECM memory. <2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which
self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode (Refer to
EC-104), the DTC is stored in the ECM memory even in the 1st trip.
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
NFEC0031
MODELS WITH EURO-OBD SYSTEM
NFEC0031S09
DTC and 1st Trip DTC
NFEC0031S0901
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM
memory. The MI will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd
trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same mal-
function is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MI
lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up when the same malfunc-
tion occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed
between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or
light up the MI during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase
Emission-related Diagnostic Information”. Refer to EC-56.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-54. These items are required by legal
regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously
are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MI
and therefore does not warn the driver of a problem. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to page EC-88. Then perform “DTC Confirmation
Procedure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the
item requires repair.
How to read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Two Trip Detection Logic (Cont’d)
EC-45
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1320, P0705, P0750, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
+1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
+Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, Mode II and GST do not indicate whether the
malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed
in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was
driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
SEF992X
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
NFEC0031S0902
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position,
base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-75.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior-
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MI on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
1Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or
1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and
freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged
in the ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase Emission-related
Diagnostic Information”. Refer to EC-56.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-46
System Readiness Test (SRT) Code
NFEC0031S0903
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of ISO 15051-5.
As part of an emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be
used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components.
Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”,
use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer’s
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM
memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MI is “ON” during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
NFEC0031S0907
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item
(CONSULT-II indica-
tion)
Perfor-
mance Pri-
ority*1 Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding
DTC No.
CATALYST 3 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
HO2S 3 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (circuit) P0130, P0150
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (lean shift monitoring) P0131, P0151
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (rich shift monitoring) P0132, P0152
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (response monitoring) P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (high voltage) P0134, P0154
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (min. voltage monitoring) P0137, P0157
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (max. voltage monitoring) P0138, P0158
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (response monitoring) P0139, P0159
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (high voltage) P0140, P0160
HO2S HTR 3 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) P0135, P0155
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) P0141, P0161
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority
for models with CONSULT-II.
SRT Set Timing
NFEC0031S0908
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done
regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is
shown in the table below.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-47
Self-diagnosis result
Example
Diagnosis Ignition cycle
←ON →OFF ←ON →OFF ←ON →OFF ←ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
P1402 NG — NG NG
(Consecutive NG)
(1st trip)
DTC 1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC DTC
(= MI “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT
will indicate “CMPLT”. →Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indi-
cate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. →Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. →Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case1&2)ortwo(2)foroneofself-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary of each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
+The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
+The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
+When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diag-
nosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
+If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior
to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
NFEC0031S0909
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-48
SEF573XB
*1 EC-45 *2 EC-49 *3 EC-50
How to Display SRT Code
NFEC0031S0910
With CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed as shown below.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-49
SEC183C
With GST
Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
How to Set SRT Code
NFEC0031S0911
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
With CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table
on EC-47.
Without CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-50
Driving Pattern
=NFEC0031S0912
SEC184C
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-51
+The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time required, for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
− Sea level
− Flat road
− Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
− Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
+The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 70 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
+The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 70 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
+The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 92 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
+When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
+The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4:
+Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes.
+The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving.
+If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
1) Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle.
2) Repeat driving pattern shown below at least 10 times.
+During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
SEF414S
*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models
Set the selector lever in the “D” position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-52
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: For quick acceleration in low altitude
areas and high altitude areas
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change ACCEL shift point
km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point
km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd 21 (13) 21 (13) 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 37 (23) 26 (16) 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 53 (33) 44 (27) 64 (40)
4th to 5th 63 (39) 58 (36) 72 (45)
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the
highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road
conditions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
Gear km/h (MPH)
1st 50 (30)
2nd 89 (55)
3rd 128 (80)
4th —
5th —
Test Value and Test Limit (GST Only — not Applicable to CONSULT-II)
NFEC0031S0904
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of ISO 15031-5.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (26 test
items).
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen. X: Applicable —: Not applicable
SRT item Self-diagnostic test item Test value (GST display) Test limit Application
TID CID
CATALYST
Three way catalyst function
(bank 1) 01H 01H Max. X
Three way catalyst function
(bank 2) 03H 02H Max. X
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-53
SRT item Self-diagnostic test item Test value (GST display) Test limit Application
TID CID
O2 SENSOR
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(bank 1)
09H 04H Max. X
0AH 84H Min. X
0BH 04H Max. X
0CH 04H Max. X
0DH 04H Max. X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(bank 2)
11H 05H Max. X
12H 85H Min. X
13H 05H Max. X
14H 05H Max. X
15H 05H Max. X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
(bank 1)
19H 86H Min. X
1AH 86H Min. X
1BH 06H Max. X
1CH 06H Max. X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
(bank 2)
21H 87H Min. X
22H 87H Min. X
23H 07H Max. X
24H 07H Max. X
O2 SENSOR HEATER
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
(bank 1)
29H 08H Max. X
2AH 88H Min. X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
(bank 2)
2BH 09H Max. X
2CH 89H Min. X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
(bank 1)
2DH 0AH Max. X
2EH 8AH Min. X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
(bank 2)
2FH 0BH Max. X
30H 8BH Min. X
Emission-related Diagnostic Information Items
NFEC0031S0905
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 SRT code Test value/ Test
limit
(GST only) 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 ————
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 — — X EC-134
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 — — X EC-141
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0115 — — X EC-146
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC P0120 — — X EC-151
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-54
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 SRT code Test value/ Test
limit
(GST only) 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 X X X*2 EC-158
HO2S1 (B1) P0131 X X X*2 EC-168
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 X X X*2 EC-176
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 X X X*2 EC-184
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 X X X*2 EC-197
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 X X X*2 EC-205
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 X X X*2 EC-212
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 X X X*2 EC-223
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 X X X*2 EC-234
HO2S2 (B1) P0140 X X X*2 EC-245
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 X X X*2 EC-254
HO2S1 (B2) P0150 X X X*2 EC-158
HO2S1 (B2) P0151 X X X*2 EC-168
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 X X X*2 EC-176
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 X X X*2 EC-184
HO2S1 (B2) P0154 X X X*2 EC-197
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0155 X X X*2 EC-205
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 X X X*2 EC-212
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 X X X*2 EC-223
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 X X X*2 EC-234
HO2S2 (B2) P0160 X X X*2 EC-245
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0161 X X X*2 EC-254
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 P0171 — — X EC-261
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 P0172 — — X EC-269
FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2 P0174 — — X EC-261
FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2 P0175 — — X EC-269
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 — — X EC-276
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 — — X EC-281
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 — — X EC-281
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 — — X EC-281
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 — — X EC-281
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 — — X EC-281
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 — — X EC-281
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 — — X EC-281
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 — — — EC-289
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 — — X EC-295
CMP SEN/CIRCUIT P0340 — — X EC-303
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-55
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 SRT code Test value/ Test
limit
(GST only) 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 X X X*2 EC-309
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 X X X*2 EC-309
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 — — X EC-314
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 — — X EC-320
IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 — — X EC-324
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 — — X EC-333
ECM P0605 — — X EC-341
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 — — X AT-122
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 — — X AT-128
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 — — X AT-134
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 — — X AT-139
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 — — X AT-144
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 — — X AT-150
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 — — X AT-156
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 — — X AT-162
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 — — X AT-171
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 — — X AT-176
SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 — — X AT-182
SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 — — X AT-187
SWIRL CONT SOL/V P1131 — — X EC-344
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 — — X EC-351
CKP SEN (REF)/CIRC P1335 — — X EC-380
CKP SENSOR (COG) P1336 — — X EC-387
A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 — — X EC-395
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 — — X AT-192
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 — — X EC-398
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 — — X AT-201
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These are not displayed with GST.
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate bank 1 and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate bank 2.
How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information
NFEC0031S0906
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II)
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-7), skip steps 2 through 4.
1) If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2) Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3) Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4) Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-56
5) Touch “ENGINE”.
6) Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7) Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
+If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased
individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
SEF823YA
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
How to Erase DTC ( With GST)
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-7), skip step 2.
1) If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2) Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis
only to erase the DTC.)
3) Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST.
+If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after approx.
24 hours.
+The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-57
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
7) Distance traveled while MI is activated
8) Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
MODELS WITHOUT EURO-OBD SYSTEM
NFEC0031S10
DTC and 1st Trip DTC
NFEC0031S1001
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. If the same mal-
function is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from
the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored
in the ECM memory. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory when the same malfunction occurs
in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the
1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For fail-safe items, the DTC is stored in the
ECM memory even in the 1st trip.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase
Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-59
When a (1st trip) DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-88. Then perform “DTC Confirmation Proce-
dure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item
requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
Without CONSULT-II
ECM displays the DTC by a set of four digit numbers with MI illumination in the diagnostic test mode II (Self-
diagnostic results). Example: 0100, 0115, 0340, 1335, etc.
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Examples: P0100, P0115, P0340, P1335,
etc.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
+1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
+Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, ECM in the diagnostic test mode II (Self-diag-
nostic results) does not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the
past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below.
Therefore, the use of CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
A sample CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in the SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
SEF992X
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-58
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
NFEC0031S1002
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, throttle valve opening, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II. For
details, see EC-75.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior-
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember,
only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and another freeze frame data occurs later, the first (origi-
nal) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase Emission-related
Diagnostic Information”, EC-59.
How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information
NFEC0031S1003
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II)
1) If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2) Touch “ENGINE”.
3) Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4) Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
SEC074C
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
How to Erase DTC ( Without CONSULT-II)
1) If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2) Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by using the data link connector. (See EC-62.)
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by changing the diagnostic test mode.
+If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after approx.
24 hours.
+Erasing the emission-related diagnostic information using CONSULT-II is easier and quicker than
switching the diagnostic test mode using the data link connector.
+The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-59
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS)
NFEC0649
SEF515Y
+If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNC-
TION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with
CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to “NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS)” in EL section.
+Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
+When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) igni-
tion key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS)
initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual,
IVIS/NVIS.
Malfunction Indicator (MI)
DESCRIPTION
NFEC0032
SAT652J
The MI is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MI will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
+If the MI does not light up, refer to EL-145, WARNING LAMPS or see EC-558.
2. When the engine is started, the MI should go off.
If the MI remains on, the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
EC-60
On Board Diagnostic System Function
=NFEC0032S01
The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
Diagnostic Test
Mode KEY and ENG.
Status Function Explanation of Function
Mode I Ignition switch in
ON position
Engine stopped
BULB CHECK This function checks the MI bulb for damage (blown,
open circuit, etc.).
If the MI does not come on, check MI circuit. (See
EC-558.)
Engine running MALFUNCTION
WARNING This is a usual driving condition. When the ECM’s CPU
is malfunctioning, the MI will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
Mode II Ignition switch in
ON position
Engine stopped
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
MONITOR (FRONT) This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or
rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), to be
read.
MI Flashing without DTC
NFEC0032S0102
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MI may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag-
nostic test mode following “How to Switch Diagnostic Test Modes”, EC-62.
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later.
(Refer to EC-63.)
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) code
6) Test values
7) Distance traveled while MI is activated
8) Others
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator (MI) (Cont’d)
EC-61
How to Switch Diagnostic Test Modes
NFEC0032S07
SEF994XB
*1 EC-558
*2 EC-61
*3 EC-558 *4 EC-104
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator (MI) (Cont’d)
EC-62
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check
NFEC0032S03
In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EL-145,
“WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-558.
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning
NFEC0032S04
MI Condition
ON When the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning.
OFF No malfunction.
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Self-diagnostic Results
NFEC0032S08
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MI.
A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code.
SEF952W
A particular DTC can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated by the
number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consist-
ing of an ON (0.6-second)-OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0 second OFF. In other words, the lat-
ter numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one DTC to another occurs at an interval of 1.8 second off.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no
malfunction. (See TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX, EC-7.)
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
NFEC0032S0801
The DTC can be erased from the backup memory in the ECM when the diagnostic test mode is changed from
Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to “How to Switch Diagnostic Test Modes”, EC-62.)
+If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory after approx. 24 hours.
+Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator (MI) (Cont’d)
EC-63
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor (front)
=NFEC0032S09
In this mode, the MI displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1 (front).
MI Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.
To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm
it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the
MI comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
ECM will start heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B1) monitoring.
How to Switch Monitored Sensor from Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa
NFEC0032S0901
+The following procedure should be performed while the engine is running.
1. Connect CHK and IGN terminals of data link connector with a suitable harness.
2. Wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Disconnect the suitable harness between CHK and IGN terminals of data link connector.
SEF134MD
OBD System Operation Chart (Models with
Euro-OBD System)
NFEC0650
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
NFEC0650S01
+When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
+When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MI will come on. For details, refer to “Two Trip Detection Logic” on
EC-44.
+The MI will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
+The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel
Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driv-
ing pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator (MI) (Cont’d)
EC-64
mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
+The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
NFEC0650S02
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MI (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-67.
For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-69.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Models with Euro-OBD System) (Cont’d)
EC-65
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
NFEC0650S03
SEF392SA
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MI will light up.
*2: MI will go off after vehicle is driven
3 times (pattern B) without any
malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
the DTC and the freeze frame
data will be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame
data will not be displayed any
longer after vehicle is driven 80
times (pattern C) without the same
malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame
data still remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected
for the first time, the 1st trip DTC
and the 1st trip freeze frame data
will be stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared
at the moment OK is detected.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
trip freeze frame data will be
cleared.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Models with Euro-OBD System) (Cont’d)
EC-66
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
NFEC0650S04
Driving Pattern B
NFEC0650S0401
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
+The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
+The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
+The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in EC-66)
Driving Pattern C
NFEC0650S0402
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
1) The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) ×(1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
+When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
+When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
+The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of driving pattern C.
+The C counter will be counted up when driving pattern C is satisfied without the same malfunction.
+The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
+The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Models with Euro-OBD System) (Cont’d)
EC-67
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
NFEC0650S05
SEF393SA
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MI will light up.
*2: MI will go off after vehicle is driven
3 times (pattern B) without any
malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
the DTC and the freeze frame
data will be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame
data will not be displayed any
longer after vehicle is driven 40
times (pattern A) without the same
malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame
data still remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected
for the first time, the 1st trip DTC
and the 1st trip freeze frame data
will be stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
without the same malfunction.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
trip freeze frame data will be
cleared.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Models with Euro-OBD System) (Cont’d)
EC-68
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
NFEC0650S06
Driving Pattern A
NFEC0650S0601
AEC574
+The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
+The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
+The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
Driving Pattern B
NFEC0650S0602
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
+The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
+The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
+The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in EC-68).
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Models with Euro-OBD System) (Cont’d)
EC-69
SEF289XA
SEF036Y
CONSULT-II
=NFEC0034
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NFEC0034S01
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector, which is located
under drivers side dash panel.
PBR455D
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Touch “START”.
SEF995X
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
SEF824Y
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II
EC-70
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL
SYSTEMS APPLICATION
NFEC0034S02
Models with Euro-OBD System
NFEC0034S0201
Item
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
WORK
SUP-
PORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA
MONI-
TOR
DATA
MONI-
TOR
(SPEC)
ACTIVE
TEST
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DTC*1 FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUP-
PORT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
INPUT
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS) XXXX
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) X X X
Mass air flow sensor X X X
Engine coolant temperature sen-
sor XXXXX
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) X X X X X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) X X X X X
Vehicle speed sensor XXXX
Throttle position sensor X X X
Fuel tank temperature sensor X X X
Absolute pressure sensor X X
Intake air temperature sensor X X X
Knock sensor X
Ignition switch (start signal) X X
Closed throttle position switch X X X
Closed throttle position switch
(throttle position sensor signal) XX
Air conditioner switch X X
Park/neutral position (PNP)
switch XXX
Power steering oil pressure
switch XX
Battery voltage X X
Ambient air temperature switch X X
Load signal X X
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-71
Item
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
WORK
SUP-
PORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA
MONI-
TOR
DATA
MONI-
TOR
(SPEC)
ACTIVE
TEST
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DTC*1 FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUP-
PORT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
OUTPUT
Injectors X X X
Power transistor (Ignition timing) X X X
IACV-AAC valve X X X X
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve X XXX X
Air conditioner relay X X
Fuel pump relay X X X X
Cooling fan X X X X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
(front) XXXX
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(rear) XXXX
Swirl control valve control sole-
noid valve X XXX
Electronic controlled engine
mount XXX
Calculated load value X X X
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-46.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-72
Models without Euro-OBD System
NFEC0034S0202
Item
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
WORK
SUPPORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA
MONITOR
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
ACTIVE
TEST
DTC*1 FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
INPUT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) XXXX
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) XXXX
Mass air flow sensor X X X
Engine coolant temperature sensor XXXXX
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) X X X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) X X
Vehicle speed sensor X X X
Throttle position sensor XXXX
Fuel tank temperature sensor X X
Absolute pressure sensor X X
Intake air temperature sensor X X X
Knock sensor X
Ignition switch (start signal) X X
Closed throttle position switch (throttle
position sensor signal) XX
Air conditioner switch X X
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch X X
Power steering oil pressure switch X X
Battery voltage XX
Ambient air temperature switch X X
Load signal XX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-73
Item
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
WORK
SUPPORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA
MONITOR
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
ACTIVE
TEST
DTC*1 FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
OUTPUT
Injectors XXX
Power transistor (Ignition timing) X
(Ignition
signal) XXX
IACV-AAC valve X X X
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve XXX
Air conditioner relay X X
Fuel pump relay X X X X
Cooling fan X X X X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) X X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) X X
Swirl control valve control solenoid valve X X X
VIAS control solenoid valve X X X
Electronic controlled engine mount X X X
Calculated load value X X X
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-59.
FUNCTION
NFEC0034S03
Diagnostic test mode Function
Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame
data can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Data monitor (spec) Input/Output specifications of the basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
other data monitor items can be read.
Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
DTC confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number ECM part numbers can be read.
*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
7) Distance traveled while MI is activated.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-74
8) Others
WORK SUPPORT MODE
NFEC0034S04
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ +FOLLOW THE BASIC INSPECTION INSTRUCTION IN
THE SERVICE MANUAL. When adjusting the idle throttle
position
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE +FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START”
DURING IDLING.
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
When releasing fuel pressure
from fuel line
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN +THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
When learning the idle air volume
SELF-LEARNING CONT +THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL
COEFFICIENT.
When clear the coefficient of self-
learnign control value
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* +IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGNITION TIMING ADJ* +IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
After adjustment, confirm target
ignition timing with a timing light.
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
NFEC0034S05
DTC and 1st Trip DTC
NFEC0034S0501
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS — INDEX” (See EC-7.)
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
NFEC0034S0502
Freeze frame data
item*1 Description
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
[PXXXX]
+The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”.
(Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-7.)
FUEL SYS-B1*2
+“Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
+One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
FUEL SYS-B2*2
CAL/LD VALUE [%] +The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
or [°F] +The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] +“Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
+The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
S-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%]
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] +“Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
+The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel sched-
ule than short-term fuel trim.
L-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%]
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] +The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VHCL SPEED [km/h] or
[mph] +The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
ABSOL TH·P/S [%] or
[degree] +The throttle valve opening at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-75
Freeze frame data
item*1 Description
B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] +The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or
[°F] +The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
*2: Regarding A33 model, “-B1” indicates bank 1 and “-B2” indicates bank 2.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-76
DATA MONITOR MODE
=NFEC0034S06
Monitored item [Unit] ECM
input
signals
Main
signals Description Remarks
ENG SPEED [rpm] jj
+Indicates the engine speed computed
from the REF signal (120° signal) of
the crankshaft position sensor (REF).
CKPS·RPM (POS)
[rpm] j
+Indicates the engine speed computed
from the POS signal (1° signal) of the
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
+Accuracy becomes poor if engine
speed drops below the idle rpm.
+If the signal is interrupted while the
engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
POS COUNT j
+Indicates the number of signal plate
(Flywheel/Drive Plate) cogs (tooth)
during one revolution of the engine.
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] jj
+The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor is displayed.
+When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
COOLAN TEMP/S
[°C] or [°F] jj
+The engine coolant temperature
(determined by the signal voltage of
the engine coolant temperature sen-
sor) is displayed.
+When the engine coolant temperature
sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
enters fail-safe mode. The engine
coolant temperature determined by the
ECM is displayed.
HO2S1 (B1) [V] jj
+The signal voltage of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) is displayed.
HO2S1 (B2) [V] jj
HO2S2 (B1) [V] jj
+The signal voltage of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 (rear) is displayed.
HO2S2 (B2) [V] jj
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN] j
+Display of heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) signal during air-fuel ratio feed-
back control:
RICH ... means the mixture became
“rich”, and control is being affected
toward a leaner mixture.
LEAN ... means the mixture became
“lean”, and control is being affected
toward a rich mixture.
+After turning ON the ignition switch,
“RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mix-
ture ratio feedback control begins.
+When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
clamped, the value just before the
clamping is displayed continuously.
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN] j
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN] j
+Display of heated oxygen sensor 2
(rear) signal:
RICH ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
small.
LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
large.
+When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN] j
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph] jj
+The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed sensor signal is dis-
played.
BATTERY VOLT [V] jj
+The power supply voltage of ECM is
displayed.
THRTL POS SEN [V] jj
+The throttle position sensor signal volt-
age is displayed.
FUEL T/TMP SE
[°C] or [°F] j
+The fuel temperature judged from the
fuel tank temperature sensor signal
voltage is displayed.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-77
Monitored item [Unit] ECM
input
signals
Main
signals Description Remarks
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F] jj
+The intake air temperature determined
by the signal voltage of the intake air
temperature sensor is indicated.
START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF] jj
+Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
starter signal.
+After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
played regardless of the starter signal.
CLSD THL/P SW
[ON/OFF] j
+Indicates mechanical contact
[ON/OFF] condition of the closed
throttle position switch.
CLSD THL POS
[ON/OFF] jj
+Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com-
puted by ECM according to the throttle
position sensor signal.
AIR COND SIG
[ON/OFF] jj
+Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
conditioner switch as determined by
the air conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF] jj
+Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position (PNP) switch sig-
nal.
PW/ST SIGNAL
[ON/OFF] jj
+[ON/OFF] condition of the power steer-
ing oil pressure switch determined by
the power steering oil pressure signal
is indicated.
AMB TEMP SW
[ON/OFF] j+Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
ambient air temperature switch signal.
IGNITION SW
[ON/OFF] j+Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
ignition switch.
INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] j+Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
width compensated by ECM according
to the input signals.
+When the engine is stopped, a certain
computed value is indicated.
INJ PULSE-B2 [msec]
B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] j
+“Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board
correction.
IGN TIMING [BTDC] j+Indicates the ignition timing computed
by ECM according to the input signals.
+When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
IACV-AAC/V [step] j
+Indicates the IACV-AAC valve control
value computed by ECM according to
the input signals.
PURG VOL C/V [%]
+Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control
value computed by the ECM according
to the input signals.
+The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] j+The mean value of the air-fuel ratio
feedback correction factor per cycle is
indicated.
+When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
+This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] j
AIR COND RLY
[ON/OFF] j
+The air conditioner relay control condi-
tion (determined by ECM according to
the input signal) is indicated.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-78
Monitored item [Unit] ECM
input
signals
Main
signals Description Remarks
FUEL PUMP RLY
[ON/OFF]
+Indicates the fuel pump relay control
condition determined by ECM accord-
ing to the input signals.
COOLING FAN
[ON/OFF]
+Indicates the control condition of the
cooling fan (determined by ECM
according to the input signal).
HIGH ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation
OFF ... Stop
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF] +Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
determined by ECM according to the
input signals.
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF] +Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
determined by ECM according to the
input signals.
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
+“Calculated load value” indicates the
value of the current airflow divided by
peak airflow.
ABSOL TH·P/S [%]
+“Absolute throttle position sensor” indi-
cates the throttle opening computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of
the throttle position sensor.
MASS AIRFLOW
[g·m/s]
+Indicates the mass airflow computed
by ECM according to the signal volt-
age of the mass airflow sensor.
ABSOL PRES/SE [V] j+The signal voltage of the absolute
pressure sensor is displayed.
SWRL CONT S/V
[ON/OFF]
+The control condition of the swirl con-
trol valve control solenoid valve (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.
+ON ... Swirl control valve is closed.
OFF ... Swirl control valve is opened.
LOAD SIGNAL
[ON/OFF] jj
+Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal and/or lighting
switch.
ON ... rear defogger is operating
and/or lighting switch is on.
OFF ... rear defogger is not operating
and lighting switch is not on.
TRVL AFTER MIL
[km] or [Mile] +Distance traveled while MI is activated
FPCM DR VOLT [V] +This item is not available. A certain
value is indicated.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-79
Monitored item [Unit] ECM
input
signals
Main
signals Description Remarks
VIAS S/V
[ON/OFF]
+The control condition of the VIAS con-
trol solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
+OFF ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
not operating.
ON ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
operating.
ENGINE MOUNT
[IDLE/TRVL]
+The control condition of the electronic
controlled engine mount (computed by
ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
+IDLE ... Idle condition
+TRVL ... Driving condition
IDL A/V LEAN
+Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET ... Idle air volume learning has
not been performed yet.
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
INCMP ... Idle air volume learning has
not been performed successfully.
Voltage [V] +Voltage measured by the voltage
probe.
Frequency
[msec] or [Hz] or [%]
+Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle
measured by the pulse probe.
+Only “#” is displayed if item is unable
to be measured.
+Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
They are the same figures as an
actual piece of data which was just
previously measured.
NOTE:
+Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
+Regarding A33 model, “-B1” indicates bank 1 and “-B2” indicates bank 2.
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
NFEC0034S11
Monitored item [Unit] ECM
input
signals
Main
signals Description Remarks
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] jj
+The signal voltage of the mass air flow sen-
sor specification is displayed.
+When the engine is running, speci-
fication range is indicated.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec] j
+“Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board correc-
tion.
+When the engine is running, speci-
fication range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] j
+Indicates the mean value of the air-fuel
ratio feedback correction factor per cycle.
+When the engine is running, speci-
fication range is indicated.
+This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] j
NOTE:
+Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
+Regarding A33 model, “B1” indicates bank 1 and “B2” indicates bank 2.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-80
ACTIVE TEST MODE
NFEC0034S07
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
FUEL INJECTION
+Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
+Change the amount of fuel injec-
tion using CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
+Harness and connector
+Fuel injectors
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
IACV-AAC/V
OPENING
+Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
+Change the IACV-AAC valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
Engine speed changes according
to the opening percent.
+Harness and connector
+IACV-AAC valve
ENG COOLANT
TEMP
+Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
+Change the engine coolant tem-
perature using CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
+Harness and connector
+Engine coolant temperature sen-
sor
+Fuel injectors
IGNITION TIMING
+Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
+Timing light: Set
+Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM. +Adjust initial ignition timing
POWER BAL-
ANCE
+Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
+A/C switch “OFF”
+Shift lever “N”
+Cut off each injector signal one
at a time using CONSULT-II.
Engine runs rough or dies.
+Harness and connector
+Compression
+Injectors
+Power transistor
+Spark plugs
+Ignition coils
COOLING FAN
+Ignition switch: ON
+Turn the cooling fan “ON” and
“OFF” using CONSULT-II. Cooling fan moves and stops.
+Harness and connector
+Cooling fan motor
+Cooling fan relay
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
+Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
+Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
Fuel pump relay makes the operat-
ing sound.
+Harness and connector
+Fuel pump relay
PURG VOL
CONT/V
+Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
+Change the EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid
valve opening percent using
CONSULT-II.
Engine speed changes according
to the opening percent.
+Harness and connector
+Solenoid valve
SWIRL CONT
SOL VALVE
+Ignition switch: ON
+Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and lis-
ten for operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
+Harness and connector
+Solenoid valve
VIAS SOL VALVE
+Ignition switch: ON
+Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and lis-
ten for operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
+Harness and connector
+Solenoid valve
ENGINE MOUNT-
ING
+Engine: After warming up, run
engine at idle speed.
+Gear position: “D”’ range
(Vehicle stopped)
+Turn electronic controlled engine
mount “IDLE” and “RAVEL” with
the CONSULT-II.
Body vibration changes according
to the electronic controlled engine
mount condition.
+Harness and connector
+Electronic controlled engine
mount
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-81
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
NFEC0034S12
SRT STATUS Mode
NFEC0034S1201
For details, refer to “SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE”,
EC-47.
SRT Work Support Mode
NFEC0034S1202
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT
while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC Work Support Mode
NFEC0034S1203
Test mode Test item Condition Reference page
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B1) P0130
Refer to corresponding
trouble diagnosis for
DTC.
EC-158
HO2S1 (B1) P0131 EC-168
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 EC-176
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-184
HO2S1 (B2) P0150 EC-158
HO2S1 (B2) P0151 EC-168
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 EC-176
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 EC-184
HO2S2
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 EC-212
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 EC-223
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-234
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 EC-212
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 EC-223
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-234
SEF705Y
SEF707X
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE
(RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
NFEC0034S10
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by
touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
1) “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
+The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in
real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR”
in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ...
xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction detec-
tion is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%,
“REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched
on the screen during “ Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-TIME
DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION
MANUAL.
2) “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
+DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-82
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
Use these triggers as follows:
1) “AUTO TRIG”
+While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunc-
tion at the moment it is detected.
+While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II
should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, espe-
cially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twist-
ing) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction
is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to
GI-22, “Incident Simulation Tests”.
2) “MANU TRIG”
+If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR”
is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data
can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with
the value for the normal operating condition.
SEF720X
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
EC-83
SEF139P
Generic Scan Tool (GST)
=NFEC0866
DESCRIPTION
NFEC0866S01
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with ISO15031-4
has 8 different functions explained on the next page.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service
manual.
SEF289XA
SEF036Y
GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NFEC0866S02
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector, which is located under
the driver side dash panel.
SEF398S
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF416S
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service pro-
cedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST)
EC-84
FUNCTION
NFEC0866S03
Diagnostic test mode Function
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog
inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, distance traveled while MI is activated
and system status information.
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA) This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM
during the freeze frame. (For details, refer to “Freeze Frame Data”, EC-46.)
MODE 3 DTCs This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were
stored by ECM.
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
+Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
+Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
+Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
+Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
+Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
+Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific
components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related
powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving
conditions.
MODE 8 — This mode is not applicable on this vehicle.
MODE 9 (CALIBRATION ID) This mode enables the off-board (External test equipment) to request specific vehicle
information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST) (Cont’d)
EC-85
MEF036D
SEF233G
SEF234G
Introduction
NFEC0036
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators.
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no problems
such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other problems with
the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-88.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such problems, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example on next page should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle.
SEF907L
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
NFEC0036S01
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction
of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make
trouble-shooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
EC-86
Worksheet Sample
NFEC0036S0101
MTBL0513
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
EC-87
Work Flow
NFEC0651
SEF510ZD
*1 EC-104
*2 If time data of “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” is other than “0” or
“[1t]”, perform “TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT”, EC-126.
*3 If the incident cannot be verified,
perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-126.
*4 If the on board diagnostic system
cannot be performed, check main
power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-127.
*5 If malfunctioning part cannot be
detected, perform “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
TENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
*6 EC-51
*7 EC-122
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow
EC-88
DESCRIPTION FOR WORK FLOW
NFEC0651S01
STEP DESCRIPTION
STEP I Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
“DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-86.
STEP II
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and
the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-56, EC-59.) The (1st trip) DTC
and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-105.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
STEP III
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CON-
SULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
STEP IV
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read
the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The
(1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
STEP V
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-90. If CONSULT-II is available, perform
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICA-
TION VALUE”. (Refer to EC-122.) (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “REPAIR/REPLACE”.) Then perform
inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-105.)
STEP VI
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect
the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-109, EC-114.
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to GI-24, “Circuit
Inspection”.
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-126.
STEP VII
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions
and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the inci-
dent is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in
ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-56, EC-59.)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow (Cont’d)
EC-89
Basic Inspection
NFEC0038
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical loads applied;
+Headlamp switch is OFF,
+Air conditioner switch is OFF,
+Rear window defogger switch is OFF,
+Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light only
small lamps.
1 INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem, or a current need for scheduled
maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
+Harness connectors for improper connections
+Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
+Wiring for improper connections, pinches and cuts
+Air cleaner clogging
+Hoses and ducts for leaks
SEF983U
©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK THROTTLE DRUM OPERATION
Confirm that throttle drum is in contact with the stopper.
SEC016C
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 3.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection
EC-90
3 CHECK ACCELERATOR WIRE INSTALLATION
Check accelerator wire for slack.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Adjust accelerator wire. Refer to FE-3, “Adjusting Accelerator Wire”.
4 CHECK THROTTLE VALVE OPERATION
1. Remove intake air ducts.
2. Check throttle valve operation when moving throttle drum by hand.
OK or NG
OK ©Retighten the throttle drum fixing nuts.
NG ©Clean the throttle body and throttle valve.
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select ”CLSD THL/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Read “CLSD THL/P SW” signal under the following conditions.
+Insert a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between stopper and throttle drum as
shown in the figure and check the signal.
SEC017C
SEF173Y
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “ON” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “OFF” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 6.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-91
6 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I
With CONSULT-II
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
2. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure.
SEC017C
3. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches to “OFF”.
SEC018C
SEF305Y
©GO TO 7.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-92
7 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
+Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches from “OFF” to
“ON”, then temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
SEC018C
2. Make sure two or three times that the signal is “ON” when the throttle valve is closed and “OFF” when it is opened.
3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
4. Make sure two or three times that the signal remains “OFF” when the throttle valve is closed.
5. Tighten throttle position sensor.
6. Check the “CLSD THL/P SW” signal again.
The signal remains “OFF” while closing throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 6.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-93
8 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY
With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle posi-
tion memory will not be reset correctly.
1. Remove feeler gauge.
2. Start engine.
3. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
4. Select “CLSD THL POS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
5. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
6. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF864V
7. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until “CLSD THL POS” signal changes to “ON”.
SEF061Y
©GO TO 13.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-94
9 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4and 5under the following conditions.
SEF711X
+Insert the 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between the stopper and throttle drum
as shown in the figure.
SEC017C
“Continuity should exist” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“Continuity should not exist” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©GO TO 10.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-95
10 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
2. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure.
SEC017C
3. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until continuity does not exist.
SEF711X
SEC018C
©GO TO 11.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-96
11 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II
Without CONSULT-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
+Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when the continuity comes to exist, then temporarily
tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
SEC018C
2. Make sure two or three times that the continuity exists when the throttle valve is closed and continuity does not exist
when it is opened.
3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
4. Make sure two or three times that the continuity does not exist when the throttle valve is closed.
5. Tighten throttle position sensor.
6. Check the continuity again.
Continuity does not exist while closing the throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©GO TO 10.
12 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle posi-
tion memory will not be reset correctly.
1. Remove feeler gauge.
2. Reconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
3. Start engine.
4. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
5. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
6. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF864V
7. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7, 20 times.
©GO TO 13.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-97
13 CHECK (1ST TRIP) DTC
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Rev (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times.
3. Make sure no (1st trip) DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 15.
NG ©GO TO 14.
14 REPAIR MALFUNCTION
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.
©GO TO 13.
15 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE engine)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE engine)
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE engine)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE engine)
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 25.
NG ©GO TO 16.
16 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-41.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT ©GO TO 17.
INCMP ©1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Leaning”.
2. GO TO 16.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-98
17 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE engine)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE engine)
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE engine)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE engine)
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 23.
NG (Models with Euro-
OBD system)
©GO TO 19.
NG (Models without
Euro-OBD system)
©GO TO 18.
18 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check IACV-AAC valve circuit for open and short. Refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-472.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 19.
NG ©1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 20.
19 REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE
Replace IACV-AAC valve.
©GO TO 20.
20 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-41.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT ©GO TO 21.
INCMP ©1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 16.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-99
21 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE engine)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE engine)
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE engine)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE engine)
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 23.
NG ©GO TO 22.
22 CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely
the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-60.
©GO TO 16.
23 CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
SEF572X
Ignition timing:
M/T 15°±5° BTDC (VQ30DE engine)
M/T 9°±5° BTDC (VQ20DE engine)
A/T 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) (VQ30DE engine)
A/T 9°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) (VQ20DE engine)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 31.
NG ©GO TO 24.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-100
24 CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-28, “Installation”.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 22.
NG ©1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 16.
25 CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
SEF572X
Ignition timing:
M/T 15°±5° BTDC (VQ30DE engine)
M/T 9°±5° BTDC (VQ20DE engine)
A/T 15°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) (VQ30DE engine)
A/T 9°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) (VQ20DE engine)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 31.
NG ©GO TO 26.
26 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-41.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT ©GO TO 27.
INCMP ©1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 26.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-101
27 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE engine)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE engine)
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE engine)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE engine)
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 29.
NG ©GO TO 28.
28 CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS (NISSAN
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-60.
©GO TO 26.
29 CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
Check ignition timing again. Refer to Test No. 25.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 31.
NG ©GO TO 30.
30 CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-28, “Installation”.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 28.
NG ©1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 26.
31 ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC No. might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
Refer to “How to Erase Emission-Related Diagnostic Information”, EC-56 and AT-38, “HOW TO ERASE DTC”.
©INSPECTION END
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
EC-102
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
NFEC0652
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prior-
ity chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1+P0100 Mass air flow sensor
+P0110 Intake air temperature sensor
+P0115 Engine coolant temperature sensor
+P0120 Throttle position sensor
+P0180 Fuel tank temperature sensor
+P0325 Knock sensor
+P0335 P1336 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
+P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
+P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
+P0605 ECM
+P1320 Ignition signal
+P1335 Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
+P1605 A/T diagnosis communication line
+P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
2+P0130-P0134, P0150-P0154 Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
+P0135 P0155 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
+P0137-P0140, P0157-P0160 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
+P0141 P0161 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
+P0443 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
+P0510 Closed throttle position switch
+P0705-P0755 P1705 P1760 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
3+P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
+P0306 - P0300 Misfire
+P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
+P0505 IACV-AAC valve
+P0731-P0734 A/T function
+P1131 Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
EC-103
Fail-safe Chart
=NFEC0653
The ECM enters fail-safe mode, if any of the following malfunctions is detected due to the open or short cir-
cuit. When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode of ECM, the MI illuminates.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0100 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0115 Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after
turning ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes
after ignition ON or Start 80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
P0120 Throttle position sensor cir-
cuit Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the
engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
P1335 Crankshaft position sensor
(REF) circuit Compression TDC signal (120° signal) is controlled by camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) signal and crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal. Ignition timing will be
delayed 0° to 2°.
Unable to
access ECM ECM ECM fail-safe activating condition
The computing function of the ECM was judged to be malfunctioning.
When the fail-safe system activates (i.e., if the ECM detects a malfunction condi-
tion in the CPU of ECM), the MI on the instrument panel lights to warn the driver.
However it is not possible to access ECM and DTC cannot be confirmed.
Engine control with fail-safe
When ECM fail-safe is operating, fuel injection, ignition timing, fuel pump operation,
IACV-AAC valve operation and cooling fan operation are controlled under certain
limitations.
ECM fail-safe operation
Engine speed Engine speed will not rise more than 3,000
rpm
Fuel injection Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system
Ignition timing Ignition timing is fixed at the preset valve
Fuel pump Fuel pump relay is “ON” when engine is running
and “OFF” when engine stalls
IACV-AAC valve Full open
Cooling fans Cooling fan relay “ON” (High speed condition)
when engine is running, and “OFF” when engine
stalls.
Replace ECM, if ECM fail-safe condition is confirmed.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Fail-safe Chart
EC-104
Symptom Matrix Chart
NFEC0041
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
NFEC0041S01
SYMPTOM
Reference
page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 11232 2 2 3 2EC-533
Fuel pressure regulator system 3344444 4 4 4 EC-37
Injector circuit 11232 2 2 2 EC-523
Evaporative emission system
3344444 4 4 4
EC-32
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem 1 EC-35
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-90
IACV-AAC valve circuit 1123322 2 2 2 2EC-324, 469
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 33111 1 1 1 EC-90
Ignition circuit 11 22 2 2 2 EC-369,
EC-495
Main power supply and ground circuit 22333 3 3 23EC-127
Air conditioner circuit 3 3 2 HA section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart
EC-105
SYMPTOM
Reference
page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Engine
control Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
circuit 22
EC-380
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
circuit EC-295, 451,
387
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
circuit 3EC-303
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1
12
2
222 2
EC-134
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
circuit 3
EC-158, 415
Engine coolant temperature sensor
circuit 1 3 3 EC-146
Throttle position sensor circuit 2 2 EC-151
Incorrect throttle position sensor
adjustment 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-90
Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2 3 3
3
EC-320, 465
Knock sensor circuit 2 EC-289
ECM 2233333 3 33 EC-104, 341
Start signal circuit 2 EC-529
Park/Neutral position switch circuit 3 3
33
3 EC-398, 510
Power steering oil pressure switch
circuit 2 EC-543
Electronic controlled engine mount
control circuit EC-539
Electrical load signal circuit EC-552
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
EC-106
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
NFEC0041S02
SYMPTOM
Reference
section
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel tank 5
5
FE section
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
Vapor lock
Valve deposit
5 555 5 5 5
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline,
Low octane)
Air Air duct
55555 5
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — throttle
body)
555 5
Throttle body, Throttle wire FE section
Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket —
Cranking Battery 111111 11
EL sectionAlternator circuit
Starter circuit 3
Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM section
PNP switch 4 AT section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
EC-107
SYMPTOM
Reference
section
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Engine Cylinder head 55555 5 5 5
EM section
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
66666 6 6 6
4Piston
Piston ring
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve
mechanism Timing chain
55555 5 5 5
Camshaft
Intake valve 3
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket 5555555 5 FEsection
Three way catalyst
Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
filter/Oil gallery 55555 5 5 5
MA, EM, LC
section
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LC section
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
55555 5 5 45
Thermostat 5
Water pump
Water gallery
Cooling fan 5 EC section
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
coolant MA section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
EC-108
SYMPTOM
Reference
section
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS) 11 EC-60 or EL
section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0042
Remarks:
+Specification data are reference values.
+Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
+If the real-time diagnosis results are NG and the on board diagnostic system results are OK when diagnosing the mass air flow sensor,
first check to see if the fuel pump control circuit is normal.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ENG SPEED
CKPS·RPM (POS)
+Tachometer: Connect
+Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
value.
Almost the same speed as
the CONSULT-II value.
POS COUNT +Engine: Running 179 - 181
MAS A/F SE-B1
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 1.2 - 1.8V
2,500 rpm 1.6 - 2.2V
COOLAN TEMP/S +Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) LEAN ←→ RICH
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
EC-109
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VHCL SPEED SE +Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON-
SULT-II value Almost the same speed as
the CONSULT-II value
BATTERY VOLT +Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
THRTL POS SEN
+Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
+Engine: After warming up
+Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped) Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
START SIGNAL +Ignition switch: ON →START →ON OFF →ON →OFF
CLSD THL/P SW
CLSD THL POS
+Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Throttle valve: Idle position ON
Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
AIR COND SIG +Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Air conditioner switch: “OFF” OFF
Air conditioner switch: “ON”
(Compressor operates.) ON
P/N POSI SW +Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: “P” or “N” (A/T models)
Neutral (M/T models) ON
Except above OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL +Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Steering wheel in neutral position
(forward direction) OFF
The steering wheel is turned ON
AMB TEMP SW
+Ignition switch: ON
+Compare ambient air tempera-
ture with the following:
Below 19°C (66°F) OFF
Above 25°C (77°F) ON
IGNITION SW +Ignition switch: ON →OFF →ON ON →OFF →ON
INJ PULSE-B2
INJ PULSE-B1
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.8 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 2.0 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm 1.4 - 2.6 msec
IGN TIMING
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 9°±5° BTDC (VQ20DE)
15°±5° BTDC (VQ30DE)
2,000 rpm More than 25° BTDC
IACV-AAC/V
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 2 - 10 step
2,000 rpm —
PURG VOL C/V
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 0 %
2,000 rpm —
A/F ALPHA-B2
A/F ALPHA-B1 +Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm 54 - 155%
AIR COND RLY +Air conditioner switch: OFF →ON OFF →ON
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
EC-110
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
FUEL PUMP RLY
+Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds)
+Engine running and cranking ON
Except as shown above OFF
COOLING FAN
+After warming up engine, idle
the engine.
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
(201°F) or less OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C
(219°F) Low
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
(221°F) or more HIGH
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
+Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
+Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
+Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
+Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
+Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm [After driving for 2 minutes at a speed
of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more] ON
CAL/LD VALUE
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0%
ABSOL TH·P/S
+Engine: After warming up Throttle valve: fully closed 0.0%
+Engine: After warming up
+Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped) Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80%
MASS AIRFLOW
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
ABSOL PRES/SE +Ignition switch: ON Approx. 4.4V
SWRL CONT S/V +Engine speed: Idle
Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C
(122°F). ON
Engine coolant temperature is above
50°C (122°F). OFF
ENGINE MOUNT +Engine: Running Idle “IDLE”
2,000 rpm “TRVL”
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0043
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
THRTL POS SEN, ABSOL TH·P/S, CLSD THL POS
NFEC0043S01
Below is the data for “THRTL POS SEN”, “ABSOL TH·P/S” and “CLSD THL POS” when depressing the accel-
erator pedal with the ignition switch “ON”.
The signal of “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or
rise after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
EC-111
SEF306Y
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL POS SEN, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
NFEC0043S02
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL POS SEN”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and
“INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine suffi-
ciently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
SEF241Y
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
EC-112
SEF242YC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)
EC-113
SEF575XA
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
NFEC0044
PREPARATION
NFEC0044S01
1. ECM is located behind the instrument lower cover. For this
inspection, remove instrument lower cover.
SEF038Y
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
MEC486B
3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector con-
nected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
+Open harness securing clip to make testing easier.
+Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
+Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
NFEC0044S02
SEF970W
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
NFEC0044S03
Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
EC-114
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
1 PU/R EVAP canister purge
volume control sole-
noid valve
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
SEF994U
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine).
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
SEF995U
2 R/L Heated oxygen sensor
1 heater (front) (bank
2)
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm. 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
3 OR/L Heated oxygen sensor
1 heater (front) (bank
1)
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm. 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
4 R/L Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (rear) (bank
2)
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
+After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h
(43 MPH) or more.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
+Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
5 P/B Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (rear) (bank
1)
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
+After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h
(43 MPH) or more.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
+Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
6
7
8
17
W/PU
Y/B
Y
GY/L
IACV-AAC valve [Engine is running]
+Idle speed 0.1 - 14V
16 Y/G VIAS control solenoid
valve
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm. 0 - 1.0V
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-115
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
21
22
23
30
31
32
Y/R
G/R
L/R
GY
PU/W
GY/R
Ignition signal No. 1
Ignition signal No. 2
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 6
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Idle speed
0 - 0.2V★
SEF399T
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
0.1 - 0.3V★
SEF645T
25 W/G Tachometer
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Idle speed
9-11V★
SEF579X
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
9-11V★
SEF580X
26 W/B ECM relay
(Self shutt-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
+For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
“OFF”
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
+A few seconds passed after turning ignition
switch “OFF”
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
27 B/R Air conditioner relay
[Engine is running]
+Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”
(Compressor is operating). 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
+A/C switch is “OFF”. BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
28 B/P Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch “ON”]
+For 1 second after turning ignition switch “ON”
[Engine is running] 0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
+1 second passed after turning ignition switch
“ON”.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-116
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
29 G Swirl control valve con-
trol solenoid valve
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed
+Engine coolant temperature is between 15 to
50°C (59 to 122°F).
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed
+Engine coolant temperature is above 50°C
(122°F).
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
34 LG Cooling fan relay
(High)
[Engine is running]
+Cooling fan is operating at high speed. 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
+Cooling fan is not operating. BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
35 BR/R Cooling fan relay (Low)
[Engine is running]
+Cooling fan is operating. 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
+Cooling fan is not operating. BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
36 Y A/T signal No. 3 [Engine is running]
+Idle speed
Approximately0-5V
Output voltage fluctuates peri-
odically.
37 LG A/T signal No. 5 [Engine is running]
+Idle speed
Approximately0-5V
Output voltage fluctuates peri-
odically.
38 LG/B MI
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
42 BR/W Start signal [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “START”] 9 - 12V
43 R Ignition switch
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
44
G/OR
(A/T)
G/W
(M/T)
PNP switch
[Ignition switch “ON”]
+Gear position is “Neutral position” (M/T models).
+Gear position is “P” or “N” (A/T models). Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
+Except the above gear position BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
45 G/B Air conditioner switch
signal
[Engine is running]
+Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”. Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
+A/C switch is “OFF”. BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
46 W/L Ambient air tempera-
ture switch signal
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed
+Ambient air temperature is above 25°C (77°F).
+Air conditioner is operating.
0V
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed
+Ambient air temperature is above 25°C (77°F).
+Air conditioner is not operating.
Approximately 5V
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-117
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
47 G Power steering oil
pressure switch
[Engine is running]
+Steering wheel is being turned. 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
+Steering wheel is not being turned. BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
48 B ECM ground [Engine is running]
+Idle speed Engine ground
49 W Electronic controlled
engine mount-1
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
+Except the above BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
50 W/R Electronic controlled
engine mount-2
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
+Except the above 0 - 1.0V
51 PU A/C cut signal [Engine is running]
+Air conditioner is operating. 0 - 0.5V
52 W/G Electrical load signal
[Engine is running]
+Rear window defogger: ON
+Hi-beam headlamp: ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
+Electrical load: OFF 0V
56 GY/L Throttle position switch
(Closed position)
[Engine is running]
+Accelerator pedal fully released BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
+Accelerator pedal depressed Approximately 0V
57 B ECM ground [Engine is running]
+Idle speed Engine ground
58 B Sensors’ ground [Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Idle speed Approximately 0V
60 BR/W A/T diagnosis commu-
nication line [Engine is running]
+Idle speed
Approximately 0 - 2.0V
Output voltage fluctuates peri-
odically.
61 W Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Idle speed 1.2 - 1.8V
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. 1.6 - 2.2V
62 W Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Peri-
odically change)
SEF059V
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-118
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
63 W Heated oxygen sensor
1 (front) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Peri-
odically change)
SEF059V
64 Y/G Intake air temperature
sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
intake air temperature.
65
75 W
WCrankshaft position
sensor (REF)
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Idle speed
Approximately 2.3V★
(AC voltage)
SEF581X
66
76 W
WCamshaft position sen-
sor (PHASE)
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Idle speed
Approximately 4.2V★
(AC voltage)
SEF582X
67 W/L Power supply for ECM
(Buck-up) [Ignition switch “OFF”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
68 BR A/T signal No. 1 [Engine is running]
+Idle speed
Approximately0-5V
Output voltage fluctuates peri-
odically.
69 GY Data link connector [Ignition switch “ON”]
+CONSULT-II is turned “ON”. Approximately 0V
70 Y Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
engine coolant temperature.
71 W Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
72 W Heated oxygen sensor
2 (rear) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
73 B Mass air flow sensor
ground
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Idle speed Approximately 0V
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-119
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
77 GY A/T signal No. 2 [Engine is running]
+Idle speed
Approximately0-5V
Output voltage fluctuates peri-
odically.
78 OR A/T signal No. 4 [Engine is running]
+Idle speed
Approximately0-5V
Output voltage fluctuates peri-
odically.
80 W Absolute pressure sen-
sor [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 4.4V
81 W Refrigerant pressure
sensor
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”.
(Compressor operates.)
0.36 - 3.88V
82 W Throttle position sensor
signal output
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Accelerator pedal fully released Approximately 0.4V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
+Accelerator pedal fully depressed Approximately 4V
85 W Crankshaft position
sensor (POS)
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed
Approximately 2.4V
SEF057V
[Engine is running]
+Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
Approximately 2.3V
SEF058V
86 P/L Vehicle speed sensor
[Engine is running]
+Jack up front wheels.
+In 1st gear position
+10 km/h (6 MPH)
Approximately 2.5V
SEF583X
[Engine is running]
+Jack up front wheels.
+In 2nd gear position
+30 km/h (19 MPH)
Approximately 2.0V
SEF584X
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-120
TERMI-
NAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
91 L/W Throttle position sensor
[Engine is running]
+Warm-up condition
+Accelerator pedal fully released 0.15 - 0.85V
[Ignition switch “ON”]
+Accelerator pedal fully depressed 3.5 - 4.7V
92 P/L Fuel tank temperature
sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
fuel tank temperature.
93 W Knock sensor [Engine is running]
+Idle speed Approximately 2.5V
95 BR Data link connector [Ignition switch “ON”]
+CONSULT-II is turned “ON”. Approximately 0V
101
102
103
104
105
107
R/B
L/W
R/W
PU/R
R/Y
R/L
Injector No. 1
Injector No. 5
Injector No. 2
Injector No. 6
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 4
[Engine is running]
+Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
106
108 B
BECM ground [Engine is running]
+Idle speed Engine ground
110
112 R/G
R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
111 R Sensors’ power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
115 OR Data link connector [Ignition switch “ON”]
+CONSULT-II is turned “ON”. Approximately2-11V
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
EC-121
Description
NFEC0872
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
+B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
+A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
+MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition
NFEC0873
+Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)
+Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.9836 - 1.0435 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm
2
, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
+Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
+Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
+Transmission: Warmed-up*1
+Electrical load: Not applied*2
+Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T or CVT models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until
“FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T or CVT fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates less than 0.9V. For M/T models, drive
vehicle for 5 minutes after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Cooling fans are not oper-
ating. Steering wheel is straight ahead.
SEF601Z
Inspection Procedure
NFEC0874
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale dis-
play.
1. Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-90.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1/B2” and “MAS A/F
SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-123.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Description
EC-122
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0875
SEF613ZA
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-123
SEF768Z
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-124
SEF615Z
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-125
Description
NFEC0654
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the custom-
er’s complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I
occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred
may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indi-
cate the specific problem area.
COMMON I/I REPORT SITUATIONS
NFEC0654S01
STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “[1t]”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the problem area.
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0655
1 INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-56, EC-59.
©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-27, “GROUND INSPECTION”.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Repair or replace.
3 SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-22, “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©Repair or replace.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Description
EC-126
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
NFEC0047
MEC834C
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
EC-127
MEC717C
SEF366Z
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-128
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NFEC0049
1 INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 9.
No ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 43 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF291X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Fuse block (J/B) connector M19, E89
+10A fuse
+Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch
©Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 48, 57, 106, 108 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-129
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEF589PB
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 2, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF292X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©GO TO 6.
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+15A fuses
+Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 26 and ECM relay terminal 1.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (Models with Euro-
OBD system)
©Go to “IGNITION SIGNAL”, EC-495.
OK (Models without
Euro-OBD system)
©Go to “DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL”, EC-369.
NG ©GO TO 8.
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between ECM relay and ECM
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-130
9 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 67 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF293X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 11.
NG ©GO TO 10.
10 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
©Repair harness or connectors.
11 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF294X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 17.
NG (Battery voltage
does not exist.)
©GO TO 12.
NG (Battery voltage
exists for more than a
few seconds.)
©GO TO 14.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-131
12 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEF589PB
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF295X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 14.
NG ©GO TO 13.
13 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness for open or short between ECM relay and 15A fuse
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14 CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ECM relay terminal 5.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 16.
NG ©GO TO 15.
15 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-132
16 CHECK ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
SEF296X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 17.
NG ©Replace ECM relay.
17 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 48, 57, 106, 108 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 18.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
18 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
EC-133
SEF987W
Component Description
NFEC0050
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0051
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
MAS A/F SE-B1
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 1.2 - 1.8V
2,500 rpm 1.6 - 2.2V
CAL/LD VALUE ditto Idle 14.0 - 33.0%
2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0%
MASS AIRFLOW ditto Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0053
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM when engine is not running,
(Malfunction B) an excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent
to ECM when engine is running,
(Malfunction C) a voltage from the sensor is constantly approx.
1.0V when engine is running.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NFEC0053S02
When the malfunction B is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Component Description
EC-134
Possible Cause
NFEC0426
MALFUNCTION A
NFEC0426S01
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Mass air flow sensor
MALFUNCTION B OR C
NFEC0426S02
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Intake air leaks
+Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0054
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first.
If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCE-
DURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NFEC0054S01
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0054S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 6 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-138.
With GST
NFEC0054S0103
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
No Tools
NFEC0054S0102
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”, and wait at least 6 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-138.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C
NFEC0054S02
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0054S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-138.
With GST
NFEC0054S0203
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Possible Cause
EC-135
No Tools
NFEC0054S0202
1) Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-138.
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-136
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0056
MEC835C
SEF650XB
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-137
Diagnostic Procedure
=NFEC0057
1 INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A, B or C) is duplicated?
MTBL0399
Type I or Type II
Type I ©GO TO 3.
Type II ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
+Air duct
+Vacuum hoses
+Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold collector
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Reconnect the parts.
3 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 4.
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-138
4 CHECK MAFS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (MAFS) harness connector.
SEC139C
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between MAFS terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF297X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
+Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
©Repair harness or connectors.
6 CHECK MAFS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between MAFS terminal 3 and ECM terminal 73.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-139
7 CHECK MAFS INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAFS terminal 1 and ECM terminal 61.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace mass air flow sensor.
9 CHECK MAFS SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
+Joint connector-18
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-140
SEF258X
SEF012P
Component Description
NFEC0656
The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct hous-
ing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a sig-
nal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
<Reference data>
Intake air
temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 1.23 0.27 - 0.38
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 64
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0657
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively low or high voltage from the sen-
sor is sent to ECM,
(Malfunction B) rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent
to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant
temperature sensor.
Possible Cause
NFEC0658
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Intake air temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0659
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st trip
DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MAL-
FUNCTION B”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description
EC-141
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NFEC0659S01
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0659S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-144.
With GST
NFEC0659S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF176Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NFEC0659S02
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the
shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be
easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0659S0201
1) Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C
(194°F).
a) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
b) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c) Check the engine coolant temperature.
d) If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C
(194°F), turn ignition switch “OFF” and cool down engine.
+Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature
is above 90°C (194°F).
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Start engine.
5) Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100
consecutive seconds.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-144.
With GST
NFEC0659S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-142
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0660
MEC991C
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-143
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0661
1 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect intake air temperature sensor harness connector.
SEF258X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground.
SEF301X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E8, F17
+Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor
©Repair harness or connectors.
3 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©GO TO 4.
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-144
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E8, F17
+Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor
+Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and intake air temperature sensor
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF302X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Replace intake air temperature sensor.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-145
SEF594K
Component Description
NFEC0069
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF012P
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 70
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0070
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high or low voltage
from the sensor is sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NFEC0070S02
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch
“ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II
display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
Start 80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Component Description
EC-146
Possible Cause
NFEC0429
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Engine coolant temperature sensor
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0071
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0071S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-149.
WITH GST
NFEC0071S03
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
NO TOOLS
NFEC0071S02
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-149.
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Possible Cause
EC-147
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0072
MEC721C
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-148
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0073
1 CHECK ECTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) harness connector.
SEF259X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between ECTS terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF585X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 2.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2 CHECK ECTS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
+Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and engine coolant temperature sensor
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-149
4 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-150
Description
NFEC0074
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NFEC0074S01
The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiom-
eter which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal
to the ECM.
Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sen-
sor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the “Wide open and closed
throttle position switch”, which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control.
AEC929
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0075
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
THRTL POS SEN
+Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
+Engine: After warming up
+Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped) Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
ABSOL TH·P/S
+Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine Throttle valve: fully closed 0.0%
+Engine: After warming up
+Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped) Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80%
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description
EC-151
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0077
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage
from the sensor is sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NFEC0077S02
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Throttle position sensor
circuit
Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
Possible Cause
NFEC0430
+Harness or connectors
(The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Throttle position sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0078
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
+Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
+This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in
the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is
expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-152
SEF065Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0078S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
Vehicle speed More than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position except “P” or “N” position
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-155.
WITH GST
NFEC0078S05
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
NO TOOLS
NFEC0078S04
1) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
Vehicle speed More than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position except “P” or “N” position
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and perform “Diagnostic Test Mode
II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-155.
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-153
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0079
MEC837C
SEF652XB
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-154
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0080
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.
SEC001C
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between throttle position sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF306X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-155
3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 1 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle position sensor
+Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and throttle position sensor
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 91 and throttle position sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 7.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SEF062Y
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-156
7 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MTBL0231
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
8 ADJUST CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-90.
MTBL0623
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-90.
9 CHECK THROTTLE POSTION SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18
3. Check the following
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 2 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
+Also check harness for short to power.
+Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-157
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NFEC0086
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0087
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
SEF237U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0089
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
signal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approxi-
mately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output
voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diag-
nosis checks that this time is not inordinately long.
Malfunction is detected when the voltage from the sensor is con-
stantly approx. 0.3V.
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Component Description
EC-158
Possible Cause
NFEC0432
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
SEF825Y
SEF826Y
SEF645Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0662
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0662S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0130/HO2S1 (B2) P0150” of “HO2S1
(B1)/(B2)” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3) Touch “START”.
4) Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4.
5) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 2,400 rpm (A/T)
1,600 - 2,600 rpm (M/T)
Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.0 - 10 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-163.
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Possible Cause
EC-159
SEF308XA
Overall Function Check
NFEC0663
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
NFEC0663S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank
1 signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
+The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-163.
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Overall Function Check
EC-160
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0092
BANK 1
NFEC0092S01
MEC296D
SEF854YC
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-161
BANK 2
NFEC0092S02
MEC297D
SEF855YC
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-162
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0093
1 INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
3. Make sure HO2S1 (front) harness protector color, and disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) har-
ness connector.
SEF505YA
SEF902XA
©GO TO 2.
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-163
2 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0484
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (front) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0485
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-164
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
+“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647YA
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-165
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and set ECM in diagnostic test mode-II [Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)].
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner and
approved anti-seize lubricant. Refer to “Commercial Service Tools”, EC-18.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-166
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0130 (BANK 1), P0150 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-167
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NFEC0664
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0665
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
SEF300U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0666
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is
sufficiently high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low.
When both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunc-
tion will be detected.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum and minimum voltage
from the sensor are not reached to the specified voltages.
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-168
Possible Cause
NFEC0667
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
+Fuel pressure
+Injectors
+Intake air leaks
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0668
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
+Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
+Before performing following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
SEF827Y
SEF828Y
SEF651Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0668S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0131/
HO2S1 (B2) P0151” of “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,600 rpm (A/T)
1,800 - 2,600 rpm (M/T)
Vehicle speed Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 3 - 9 msec (A/T)
2.5 - 9 msec (M/T)
Selector lever Suitable position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-170.
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-169
SEF308XA
Overall Function Check
NFEC0669
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NFEC0669S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank
1 signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
3) Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
+The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
+The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-170.
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0670
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 2.
2 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
©GO TO 3.
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check
EC-170
3 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF652Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-56.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes ©Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-261.
No ©GO TO 4.
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-171
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
1. Stop engine.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
3. Disconnect HO2S1 (front) harness connector.
4. Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 7.
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-172
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
+“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647YA
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-173
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and set ECM in diagnostic test mode-II [Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)].
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-174
8 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
3. For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130/P0150 HO2S1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (CIRCUIT)”, EC-158.
4. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
6. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130/P0150 HO2S1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (CIRCUIT)”, EC-158.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0131 (BANK 1), P0151 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (LEAN SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-175
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NFEC0671
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0672
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
SEF299U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0673
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is
sufficiently high. The “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be
detected.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum and minimum voltages
from the sensor are beyond the specified voltages.
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-176
Possible Cause
NFEC0674
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
+Fuel pressure
+Injectors
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0675
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
+Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
+Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
SEF829Y
SEF830Y
SEF655Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0675S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0132/
HO2S1 (B2) P0152” of “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,600 rpm (A/T)
1,800 - 2,600 rpm (M/T)
Vehicle speed Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 3 - 9 msec (A/T)
2.5 - 9 msec (M/T)
Selector lever Suitable position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-178.
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-177
SEF308XA
Overall Function Check
NFEC0676
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NFEC0676S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank
1 signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
3) Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
+The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
+The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-178.
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0677
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 2.
2 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
©GO TO 3.
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check
EC-178
3 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF652Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-56.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes ©Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-269.
No ©GO TO 4.
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (FRONT) CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
4. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair or replace harness or connectors.
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-179
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 7.
NG ©GO TO 8.
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-180
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
+“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647YA
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-181
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and set ECM in diagnostic test mode-II [Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)].
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
8 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-182
9 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130/P0150 HO2S1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (CIRCUIT)”, EC-158.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
For circuit, refer to P0130/P0150 HO2S1 (FRONT) (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) (CIRCUIT)”, EC-158.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0132 (BANK 1), P0152 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RICH SHIFT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-183
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NFEC0678
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0679
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
SEF010V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0680
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), this
diagnosis measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed
and load), fuel feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 (front) temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the
compensated time [heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) cycling time
index] is inordinately long or not.
Malfunction is detected when the response of the voltage signal
from the sensor takes more than the specified time.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-184
Possible Cause
NFEC0681
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
+Fuel pressure
+Injectors
+Intake air leaks
+Exhaust gas leaks
+PCV valve
+Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0682
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
+Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
+Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-185
SEF831Y
SEF832Y
SEF658Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0682S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133/
HO2S1 (B2) P0153” of “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 40 to 50 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,800 rpm (A/T)
1,800 - 3,100 rpm (M/T)
Vehicle speed More than 80 km/h (50 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 3 - 9 msec (A/T)
2.5 - 9 msec (M/T)
Selector lever Suitable position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-189.
Overall Function Check
NFEC0683
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NFEC0683S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Stop engine and set ECM in diagnostic test mode-II [Heated
oxygen sensor monitor (front)]
3) Start engine and check the following with engine speed head
of a constant 2,000 rpm under no load.
+MI comes on more than five times within 10 seconds.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-189.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-186
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0684
BANK 1
NFEC0684S01
MEC296D
SEF854YC
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
EC-187
BANK 2
NFEC0684S02
MEC297D
SEF855YC
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-188
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0685
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 2.
2 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
©GO TO 3.
3 CHECK FOR EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair or replace.
4 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair or replace.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-189
5 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF652Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-56.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes ©Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-261,
EC-269.
No ©GO TO 6.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-190
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) HARNESS PROTECTOR COLOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector.
SEF505YA
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF902XA
©GO TO 7.
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0486
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (front) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0487
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-191
8 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 13.
9 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Replace mass air flow sensor.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-192
10 CHECK PCV VALVE
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove PCV valve ventilation hose from PCV valve.
4. Make sure that a hissing noise will be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be felt immediately
when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
SEC137A
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 12.
NG ©Replace PCV valve.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-193
11 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
+“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647YA
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 14.
NG ©GO TO 13.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-194
12 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and set ECM in diagnostic test mode-II [Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)].
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 62 (HO2S1 gank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 14.
NG ©GO TO 13.
13 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
14 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 15.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-195
15 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0133 (BANK 1), P0153 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-196
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NFEC0686
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0687
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
SEF301UA
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0688
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated
oxygen sensor 1 (front) output is not inordinately high.
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Component Description
EC-197
Possible Cause
NFEC0689
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
SEF174Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0690
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0690S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-201.
WITH GST
NFEC0690S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
6) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
7) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-201.
+When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Possible Cause
EC-198
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0691
BANK 1
NFEC0691S01
MEC296D
SEF854YC
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram
EC-199
BANK 2
NFEC0691S02
MEC297D
SEF855YC
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-200
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0692
1 INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF902XA
©GO TO 2.
2 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
©GO TO 3.
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-201
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0488
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (front) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0489
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 6.
NG ©Repair or replace harness or connectors.
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-202
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
+“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown left:
SEF647YA
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-203
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and set ECM in diagnostic test mode-II [Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)].
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0134 (BANK 1), P0154 (BANK 2) HO2S1 (FRONT) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-204
Description
NFEC0693
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0693S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater
(front) control
Heated oxygen sensors 1
heater (front)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION
NFEC0693S02
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensors 1 heater (front)
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0694
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
+Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
+Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0695
Malfunction is detected when the current amperage in the heated
oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) circuit is out of the normal range.
[An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through the heated
oxygen sensor 1 heater (front).]
Possible Cause
NFEC0696
+Harness or connectors
[The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) circuit is open or
shorted.]
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Description
EC-205
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0697
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0697S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT.
2) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-209.
WITH GST
NFEC0697S02
1) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
4) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
5) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-209.
+When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-206
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0698
BANK 1
NFEC0698S01
MEC298D
SEF655XE
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-207
BANK 2
NFEC0698S02
MEC299D
SEF656XE
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-208
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0699
1 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF902XA
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between HO2S1 (front) terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF311X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
+15A fuse
+Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and fuse
©Repair harness or connectors.
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-209
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0490
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-210
5 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0135 (BANK 1), P0155 (BANK 2) HO2S1 HEATER (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-211
SEF327R
Component Description
NFEC0700
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst
(Manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each
bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0701
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
SEF304U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0702
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
(Manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunc-
tions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the
minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various
driving condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when the minimum voltage from the sen-
sor is not reached to the specified voltage.
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-212
Possible Cause
NFEC0703
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
+Fuel pressure
+Injectors
SEF833Y
SEF834Y
SEF835Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0759
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
+“COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all
tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are completed.
+If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is
stopped, retry this procedure from step 2 in “Procedure for
COND1”.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0759S01
Procedure for COND1
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S2 (B1) P0137/
HO2S2 (B2) P0157” of “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go
to the following step.
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
8) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the
conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,600 rpm
Vehicle speed Above 70 km/h (43 MPH)
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Selector lever Suitable position
NOTE:
+If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2 in “Procedure for COND1”.
+If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CON-
SULT-II screen before “Procedure for COND2” is
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-213
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Proce-
dure for COND2”.
SEF836Y
Procedure for COND2
1) While driving, release accelerator pedal completely with “OD”
OFF (A/T models only) from the above condition [step 8] until
“INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen has
turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 4 sec-
onds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-II
screen before “Procedure for COND3” is conducted, it is
unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND3”.
SEF661Y
Procedure for COND3
1) Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
a maximum of approximately 6 minutes.)
2) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-218.
SEF312XA
Overall Function Check
NFEC0705
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NFEC0705S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank
1 signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once during
this procedure.
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-214
6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-218.
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-215
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0706
BANK 1
NFEC0706S01
MEC300D
SEF657XE
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
EC-216
BANK 2
NFEC0706S02
MEC301D
SEF658XE
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-217
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0707
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 2.
2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF652Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-56.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes ©Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-269.
No ©GO TO 3.
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-218
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0491
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 (rear) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0492
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-219
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 6.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-
II.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF066Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-220
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the voltage when rewing up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEF313XB
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
8 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-221
9 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0137 (BANK 1), P0157 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MIN. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-222
SEF327R
Component Description
NFEC0708
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst
(Manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each
bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0709
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
SEF303U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0710
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
(Manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunc-
tions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the
maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the vari-
ous driving condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum voltage from the sen-
sor is not reached to the specified voltage.
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-223
Possible Cause
NFEC0711
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
+Fuel pressure
+Injectors
+Intake air leaks
SEF837Y
SEF838Y
SEF839Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0760
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
+“COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all
tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are completed.
+If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is
stopped, retry this procedure from step 2 in “Procedure for
COND1”.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0760S01
Procedure for COND1
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S2 (B1) P0138/
HO2S2 (B2) P0158” of “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go
to the following step.
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
8) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the
conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,600 rpm
Vehicle speed Above 70 km/h (43 MPH)
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Selector lever Suitable position
NOTE:
+If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2 in “Procedure for COND1”.
+If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CON-
SULT-II screen before “Procedure for COND2” is
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-224
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Proce-
dure for COND2”.
SEF840Y
Procedure for COND2
1) While driving, release accelerator pedal completely with “OD”
OFF (A/T models only) from the above condition [step 8] until
“INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen is turned
to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 4 seconds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-II
screen before “Procedure for COND3” is conducted, it is
unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND3”.
SEF665Y
Procedure for COND3
1) Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
a maximum of approximately 6 minutes.)
2) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-229.
SEF312XA
Overall Function Check
NFEC0713
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NFEC0713S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank
1 signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once during
this procedure.
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-225
6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-229.
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-226
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0714
BANK 1
NFEC0714S01
MEC300D
SEF657XE
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
EC-227
BANK 2
NFEC0714S02
MEC301D
SEF658XE
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-228
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0715
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 2.
2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF652Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-56.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes ©Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-261.
No ©GO TO 3.
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-229
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0493
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 (rear) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0494
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-230
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 6.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-
II.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF066Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-231
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEF313XB
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
8 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-232
9 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0138 (BANK 1), P0158 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (MAX. VOLTAGE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-233
SEF327R
Component Description
NFEC0716
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst
(Manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each
bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0717
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
SEF302U
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0718
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
(Manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunc-
tions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the
switching response of the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified
during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when it takes more time for the sensor to
respond between rich and lean than the specified time.
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Component Description
EC-234
Possible Cause
NFEC0719
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
+Fuel pressure
+Injectors
+Intake air leaks
SEF841Y
SEF842Y
SEF843Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0761
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
+“COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all
tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are completed.
+If “DTC Confirmation Procedure ” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is
stopped, retry this procedure from step 2 in “Procedure for
COND1”.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0761S01
Procedure for COND1
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 conds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139/
HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go
to the following step.
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
8) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the
conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,600 rpm
Vehicle speed Above 70 km/h (43 MPH)
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Selector lever Suitable position
NOTE:
+If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2 in “Procedure for COND1”.
+If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CON-
SULT-II screen before “Procedure for COND2” is
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Possible Cause
EC-235
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Proce-
dure for COND2”.
SEF844Y
Procedure for COND2
1) While driving, release accelerator pedal completely with “OD”
OFF (A/T models only) from the above condition [step 8] until
“INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen has
turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 4 sec-
onds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-II
screen before “Procedure for COND3” is conducted, it is
unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND3”.
SEF668Y
Procedure for COND3
1) Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
a maximum of approximately 6 minutes.)
2) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-240.
SEF312XA
Overall Function Check
NFEC0721
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NFEC0721S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank
1 signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-236
6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-240.
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-237
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0722
BANK 1
NFEC0722S01
MEC300D
SEF657XE
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram
EC-238
BANK 2
NFEC0722S02
MEC301D
SEF658XE
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-239
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0723
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 2.
2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
SEF652Y
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC No. 0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, EC-56.
7. Make sure DTC No. 0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
YesorNo
Yes ©Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-261,
EC-269.
No ©GO TO 3.
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-240
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0495
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 (rear) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0496
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-241
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 6.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-
II.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF066Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-242
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEF313XB
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
8 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-243
9 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0139 (BANK 1), P0159 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (RESPONSE
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-244
SEF327R
Component Description
NFEC0724
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst
(Manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each
bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0725
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S2 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
SEF305UA
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0726
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
(Manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunc-
tions of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the
voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such
as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Component Description
EC-245
Possible Cause
NFEC0727
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
SEF189Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0728
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0728S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
3) Stop vehicle with engine running.
4) Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,300 - 3,100 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE 64 - 130 km/h (40 - 80 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 0.5 - 6.4 msec
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
Selector lever Suitable position
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-250.
SEF312XA
Overall Function Check
NFEC0729
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NFEC0729S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank
1 signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Possible Cause
EC-246
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 1.4V during this procedure.
5) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-250.
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-247
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0730
BANK 1
NFEC0730S01
MEC300D
SEF657XE
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram
EC-248
BANK 2
NFEC0730S02
MEC301D
SEF658XE
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-249
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0731
1 INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
3. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
4. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
5. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
©GO TO 2.
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-250
2 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0497
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 (rear) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0498
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) CONNECTORS FOR WATER
Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) connector and harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 6.
NG ©Repair or replace harness or connectors.
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-251
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-
II.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF066Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEF313XB
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 7.
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-252
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
8 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
9 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0140 (BANK 1), P0160 (BANK 2) HO2S2 (REAR) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-253
Description
NFEC0732
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0732S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (rear) control Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (rear)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION
NFEC0732S02
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0733
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
+Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
+Engine is running above 3,600 rpm. OFF
+Engine is running below 3,600 rpm after driving for 2 minutes at a
speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more. ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0734
Malfunction is detected when the current amperage in the heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) circuit is out of the normal range.
[An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through the heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear).]
Possible Cause
NFEC0735
+Harness or connectors
[The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) circuit is open or
shorted.]
+Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Description
EC-254
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0736
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0736S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine.
3) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
4) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-258.
WITH GST
NFEC0736S02
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
3) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5) Start engine.
6) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
7) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds.
8) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
9) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-258.
+When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-255
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0737
BANK 1
NFEC0737S01
MEC302D
SEF659XE
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Wiring Diagram
EC-256
BANK 2
NFEC0737S02
MEC303D
SEF660XE
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-257
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0738
1 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 3 and ground.
SEF314X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
+15A fuse
+Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and fuse
©Repair harness or connectors.
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-258
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0499
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Check the resistance between HO2S2 (rear) terminals as follows.
SEF315X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-259
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0141 (BANK 1), P0161 (BANK 2) HO2S2 HEATER (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-260
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0739
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual
mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio
based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen
sensor 1 (front). The ECM calculates the necessary compensation
to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large
(The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condi-
tion as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MI (2
trip detection logic).
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel injection con-
trol Injectors
Malfunction is detected when fuel injection system does not oper-
ate properly, the amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large.
(The mixture ratio is too lean.)
Possible Cause
NFEC0740
+Intake air leaks
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
+Injectors
+Exhaust gas leaks
+Incorrect fuel pressure
+Lack of fuel
+Mass air flow sensor
SEF652Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0741
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0741S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT”
in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-265.
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction, too.
8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-265. If engine does
not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-261
SEC139C
WITH GST
NFEC0741S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is
detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100.
7) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-265.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-265. If engine does
not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-262
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0742
BANK 1
NFEC0742S01
MEC304D
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Wiring Diagram
EC-263
BANK 2
NFEC0742S02
MEC305D
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-264
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0743
1 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 2.
NG ©Repair or replace.
2 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Repair or replace.
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0500
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (front) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0501
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-265
4 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-36.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-37.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.35 bar, 2.4 kg/cm
2
, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (2.94 bar, 3.0 kg/cm
2
, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-533.)
+Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-37.)
+Fuel lines (Refer to MA-20, “Checking Fuel Lines”.)
+Fuel filter for clogging
©Repair or replace.
6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-134.
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-266
7 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF070Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-523.
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-267
8 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2 (for DTC P0171), bank 1 (for DTC P0174).
4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EC-38.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
The injector harness connectors on bank 1 (for DTC P0171), bank 2 (for DTC P0174) should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors.
SEF595Q
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new
ones.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0171 (BANK 1), P0174 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-268
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0744
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual
mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio
based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen
sensor 1 (front). The ECM calculates the necessary compensation
to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large
(The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condi-
tion as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MI (2
trip detection logic).
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel injection
control Injectors
Malfunction is detected when fuel injection system does not oper-
ate properly, the amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large.
(The mixture ratio is too rich.)
Possible Cause
NFEC0745
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
+Injectors
+Exhaust gas leaks
+Incorrect fuel pressure
+Mass air flow sensor
SEF652Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0746
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0746S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT”
in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-273.
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction, too.
8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-273. If
engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for
fouling, etc.
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-269
SEC139C
WITH GST
NFEC0746S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is
detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100.
7) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-273.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-273. If
engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visu-
ally.
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-270
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0747
BANK 1
NFEC0747S01
MEC304D
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
Wiring Diagram
EC-271
BANK 2
NFEC0747S02
MEC305D
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-272
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0748
1 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 2.
NG ©Repair or replace.
2 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Repair or replace.
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0502
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (front) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0503
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-273
4 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-36.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-37.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.34 bar, 2.4 kg/cm
2
, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (2.94 bar, 3.0 kg/cm
2
, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-533.)
+Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-37.)
©Repair or replace.
6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-134.
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-274
7 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF070Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-523.
8 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EC-38.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors bank 2 (for DTC P0172), bank 1 (for P0175).
The injector harness connectors on bank 1 (for P0172), bank 2 (for P0175) should remain connected.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.) ©GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.) ©Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0172 (BANK 1), P0175 (BANK 2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
(RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-275
SEF263X
Component Description
NFEC0749
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tem-
perature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF012P
<Reference data>
Fuel temperature
°C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 92
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0750
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high or low voltage is
sent to ECM, rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM, compared
with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
Possible Cause
NFEC0751
+Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Fuel tank temperature sensor
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description
EC-276
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0752
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
SEF174Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0752S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-279.
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4) Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the follow-
ing step.
5) Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F).
6) Wait at least 10 seconds.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-279.
WITH GST
NFEC0752S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-277
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0753
MEC045D
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-278
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0754
1 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
SEF263X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF586X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors B3, M6 or B2, M2
+Harness connectors M81, F49
+Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
©Repair harness or connector.
3 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-279
4 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.
SEF587X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Replace fuel level sensor unit.
5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-280
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0755
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate (vary). If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the
CKP sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MI will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (POS) signal every 200 engine revo-
lutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MI will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MI will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not cause damage to the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MI
will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the
CKP sensor (POS) signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on-multiple cylinders.
Malfunction is detected when multiple cylinders misfire, No. 1 cylinder misfires, No. 2 cylinder misfires, No. 3
cylinder misfires, No. 4 cylinder misfires, No. 5 cylinder misfires and No. 6 cylinder misfires.
Possible Cause
NFEC0756
+Improper spark plug
+Insufficient compression
+Incorrect fuel pressure
+The injector circuit is open or shorted
+Injectors
+Intake air leak
+The ignition secondary circuit is open or shorted
+Lack of fuel
+Drive plate or flywheel
+Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-281
SEF213Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0757
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0757S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Start engine again and drive at 1,500 to 3,000 rpm for at least
3 minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
NOTE:
Refer to the freeze frame data for the test driving conditions.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-282.
WITH GST
NFEC0757S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0758
1 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 2.
NG ©Discover air leak location and repair.
2 CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
1. Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst (Manifold) and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Repair or replace it.
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-282
3 PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
SEF190Y
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a
momentary engine speed drop?
SEF281XA
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 4.
No ©GO TO 7.
4 CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
MEC703B
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 5.
No ©Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-523.
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-283
5 CHECK IGNITION SPARK
1. Disconnect ignition wire from spark plug.
2. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition wire.
3. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
4. Check for spark.
SEF575Q
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to “IGNITION SIGNAL”,
EC-495.
6 CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
SEF156I
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to
MA-15, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE”.
7 CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-11, “Measurement of Compression Pressure”.
Standard:
1,275 kPa (12.75 bar, 13.0 kg/cm
2
, 185 psi)/300 rpm
Minimum:
981 kPa (9.81 bar, 10.0 kg/cm
2
, 142 psi)/300 rpm
Difference between each cylinder:
98 kPa (0.98 bar, 1.0 kg/cm
2
, 14 psi)/300 rpm
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-284
8 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-36.
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-37.
At idle:
Approx. 235 kPa (2.35 bar, 2.4 kg/cm
2
, 34 psi)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©GO TO 9.
9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-533.)
+Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-37.)
+Fuel lines (Refer to MA-20, “Checking Fuel Lines”.)
+Fuel filter for clogging
©Repair or replace.
10 CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-90.
MTBL0623
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 12.
NG ©Follow the “Basic Inspection”.
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-285
11 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (B1)/(B2)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II, and select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)/(B2)”.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
4. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
5. Check the following.
+“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown left:
SEF647YA
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 14.
NG ©GO TO 13.
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-286
12 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) (B1)/(B2)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and set ECM in diagnostic test mode-II [Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)].
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF967XA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 14.
NG ©GO TO 13.
13 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-287
14 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 15.
NG ©Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-134.
15 CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in “Symptom Matrix Chart”, EC-105.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 16.
NG ©Repair or replace.
16 ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-56.
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
©GO TO 17.
17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0300 - P0306 NO.6-1CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-288
SEF332I
Component Description
NFEC0185
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses
engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock
sensor. The MI will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The
knock sensor has one trip detection logic.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0187
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage
from the knock sensor is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
NFEC0491
+Harness or connectors
(The knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Knock sensor
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0188
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0188S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II
2) Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
3) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-292.
WITH GST
NFEC0188S04
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
NO TOOLS
NFEC0188S03
1) Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Component Description
EC-289
4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-292.
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-290
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0189
MEC736C
SEF663XB
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-291
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0190
1 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 93 and engine ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
SEF321X
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 93 and knock sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connector F8, F131
+Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-292
4 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
SEF322X
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Replace knock sensor.
5 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
Loose and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 6.
6 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F8, F131.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F8 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F8, F131
+Joint connectors-18
+Harness for open or short between harness connector F8 and engine ground
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-293
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-294
SEF254P
Component Description
NFEC0762
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects
the crankshaft position signal (1° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the gear
teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor
also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft
position signal (1° signal).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0763
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CKPS·RPM (POS)
+Tachometer: Connect
+Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CON-
SULT-II value.
Almost the same speed as the
CONSULT-II value.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0764
Malfunction is detected when 1° signal is not entered to ECM for
the first few seconds during engine cranking, or 1° signal is not
entered to ECM during engine running.
Possible Cause
NFEC0765
+Harness or connectors
[The crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is open or
shorted.]
+Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
+Starter motor (Refer to EL section.)
+Starting system circuit (Refer to EL section.)
+Dead (Weak) battery
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Component Description
EC-295
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0766
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0766S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Crank engine for at least two seconds.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-298.
WITH GST
NFEC0766S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-296
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0767
MEC850C
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-297
SEF856Y
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0768
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 2.
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-298
2 CHECK CKPS (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
SEF511WB
2. Check voltage between harness connector F25 terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF323X
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F25, F171
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
+Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK CKPS (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-299
5 CHECK CKPS (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 85 and harness connector F25 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK CKPS (POS) SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (POS) harness connector.
SEF367Q
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (POS) terminals and harness connector F171 terminals as follows.
MTBL0352
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK CKPS (POS) INSTALLATION
Check that CKPS (POS) and HO2S1 bank 2 harness clamp are installed correctly as shown below.
SEM222FE
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Install CKPS (POS) correctly.
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-300
8 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
SEF587P
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
9 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II
1. Reconnect disconnected harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 85 and ground by briefly touching the sensor core with a flat-bladed screwdriv-
ers.
SEF324X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
10 CHECK CKPS (POS) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©GO TO 11.
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-301
11 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F25, F171
+Joint connector-18
+Harness for open or short between harness connector F25 and engine ground
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-302
SEF252P
Component Description
NFEC0197
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) is located on the engine
front cover facing the camshaft sprocket. It detects the cylinder No.
signal.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the
camshaft sprocket will periodically change. Permeability near the
sensor also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder No.
signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0199
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) the cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the
first few seconds during engine cranking,
(Malfunction B) the cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM during
engine running,
(Malfunction C) the cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern
during engine running.
Possible Cause
NFEC0494
+Harness or connectors
[The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is open or
shorted.]
+Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
+Starter motor (Refer to SC section.)
+Starting system circuit (Refer to SC section.)
+Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0200
NOTE:
+Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C”.
+If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Component Description
EC-303
SEF065Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NFEC0200S01
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0200S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-306.
With GST
NFEC0200S0103
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
No Tools
NFEC0200S0102
1) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-306.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C
NFEC0200S02
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0200S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-306.
With GST
NFEC0200S0203
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
No Tools
NFEC0200S0202
1) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-306.
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-304
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0201
MEC046D
SEF857Y
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram
EC-305
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0202
1 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©Check starting system. (Refer to SC-12, “STARTING SYSTEM”.)
2 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 3.
3 CHECK CMPS (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and CMPS (PHASE) harness connector.
SEF274P
3. Check harness continuity between CMPS (PHASE) terminal 2 and ECM terminals 66, 76. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-306
4 CHECK CMPS (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between CMPS (PHASE) terminal 1 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
5 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-I
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
2. Remove the CMPS (PHASE).
3. Visually check the CMPS (PHASE) for chipping.
SEF583P
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
6 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-II
Check resistance between CMPS (PHASE) terminals 1 and 2 as shown below.
SEF325X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-307
7 CHECK CMPS (PHASE) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-308
SEF184UE
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0783
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen
sensor 1 (front) and heated oxygen sensors 2 (rear).
A three way catalyst (Manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2
(rear). As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen
sensor 2 (rear) switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) approaches a specified limit value,
the three way catalyst (Manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
Malfunction is detected when three way catalyst (Manifold) does
not operate properly, three way catalyst (Manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity.
Possible Cause
NFEC0784
+Three way catalyst (Manifold)
+Exhaust tube
+Intake air leaks
+Injectors
+Injector leaks
+Spark plug
+Improper ignition timing
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-309
SEF847Y
SEF848Y
SEF560X
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0785
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0785S01
TESTING CONDITION:
+Open engine hood before conducting the following proce-
dure.
+Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified
minutes below.
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine.
4) Rev engine up to 3,000±500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive
minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
5) Wait 5 seconds at idle.
6) Rev engine up to 2,500±500 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP”
of CATALYST changes to “CMPLT” (It will take approximately
5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
7) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
8) Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-311.
SEF329X
SEF330X
Overall Function Check
NFEC0786
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way
catalyst (Manifold). During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
WITH GST
NFEC0786S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 63 (HO2S1
bank 1 signal), 62 (HO2S1 bank 2 signal) and engine ground,
and ECM terminals 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal), 71 (HO2S2
bank 2 signal) and engine ground.
4) Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
5) Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminals 72 and engine ground, or 71 and
engine ground is very less than that of ECM terminals 63 and
engine ground, or 62 and engine ground.
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) voltage switching fre-
quency
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
EC-310
B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) voltage switching fre-
quency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst
(Manifold) does not operate properly. Go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-311.
NOTE:
If the voltage at ECM terminal 62 or 63 does not switch periodically
more than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 5, perform trouble
diagnosis for “DTC P0133, P0153” first. (See EC-184.)
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0787
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 2.
NG ©Repair or replace.
2 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before the three way catalyst (Manifold).
SEF099P
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Repair or replace.
3 CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair or replace.
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-311
4 CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-90.
MTBL0623
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Follow the “Basic Inspection”.
5 CHECK INJECTORS
1. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM for Injectors, EC-524.
2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 107 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF331X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” under “INJECTOR”, EC-525.
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-312
6 CHECK IGNITION SPARK
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
3. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
5. Check for spark.
SEF575Q
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit. Refer to “IGNITION SIGNAL”,
EC-495.
7 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EC-38.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.) ©GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.) ©Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
Trouble is fixed. ©INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed. ©Replace three way catalyst (Manifold).
DTC P0420 (BANK 1), P0430 (BANK 2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-313
Description
NFEC0788
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0788S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
EVAP canister
purge flow con-
trol
EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch Start signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Throttle position switch Closed throttle position
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by consider-
ing various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.
SEF337U
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NFEC0788S02
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0789
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PURG VOL C/V
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle (Vehicle stopped) 0%
2,000 rpm —
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Description
EC-314
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0790
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the valve.
Possible Cause
NFEC0791
+Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
+EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0792
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0792S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-317.
WITH GST
NFEC0792S02
Follow the proocedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
EC-315
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0793
MEC002D
SEF858Y
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-316
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0794
1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF266X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or
tester.
SEF333X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
+15A fuse
+Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
©Repair harness or connectors.
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-317
3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connetors.
4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF677Y
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-318
5 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-319
AEC110
Component Description
=NFEC0795
The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a
pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the
speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0796
Malfunction is detected when the almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal
from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is
being driven.
Possible Cause
NFEC0797
+Harness or connector
(The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
+Vehicle speed sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0798
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted
in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
SEF196Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0798S01
1) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”).
2) Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable
gear position.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-323.
If OK, go to following step.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Component Description
EC-320
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 6,000 rpm (A/T)
1,900 - 6,000 rpm (M/T)
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL 4 - 8 msec (A/T)
4.8 - 9 msec (M/T)
Selector lever Suitable position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-323.
Overall Function Check
NFEC0799
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle
speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
NFEC0799S01
1) Lift up drive wheels.
2) Start engine.
3) Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed
10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear posi-
tion.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-323.
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-321
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0800
MEC003D
SEF859Y
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-322
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0801
1 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 86 and combination meter terminal 32.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3 CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION
Make sure that speedometer functions properly.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©GO TO 4.
4 CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M15, E81
+Harness for open or short between combination meter and ABS actuator and electric unit
OK or NG
OK ©Check combination meter and ABS actuator and electric unitr. Refer to EL or BR section.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-323
Description
NFEC0802
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0802S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Idle air control IACV-AAC valve
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch Start signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Park/neutral position
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal
Battery Battery voltage
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Ambient air temperature switch Ambient air temperature
Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature
Absolute pressure sensor Ambient barometic pressure
This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified
level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the
amount of air which by-passes the throttle valve via IACV-AAC
valve. The IACV-AAC valve changes the opening of the air by-pass
passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actu-
ated by a step motor built into the valve, which moves the valve in
the axial direction in steps corresponding to the ECM output sig-
nals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respec-
tive opening of the air by-pass passage. (i.e. when the step
advances, the opening is enlarged.) The opening of the valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The
crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed
and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the step
position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with
the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the
lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The opti-
mum value stored in the ECM is determined by takig into consid-
eration various engine conditions, such as during warm up,
deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and
cooling fan operation).
SEF765P
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NFEC0802S02
IACV-AAC Valve
NFEC0802S0201
The IACV-AAC valve is operated by a step motor for centralized
control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases
and is actuated by the output signals of ECM which turns ON and
OFF two windings each in seqeunce. Each time the IACV-AAC
valve opens or closes to change tha auxiliary air quantity, the ECM
sends a pulse signal to the step motor. When no change in the
auxiliary air quantity is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse
signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains
at that particular opening.
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Description
EC-324
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0803
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
IACV-AAC/V
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 2 - 10 step
2,000 rpm —
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0804
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) the IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly,
(Malfunction B) the IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly.
Possible Cause
NFEC0805
MALFUNCTION A
NFEC0805S01
+Harness or connectors
(The IACV-AAC valve circuit is open.)
+IACV-AAC valve
MALFUNCTION B
NFEC0805S02
+Harness or connectors
(The IACV-AAC valve circuit is shorted.)
+Air control valve (Power steering)
+IACV-AAC valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0806
NOTE:
+If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
+If the engine idle speed is out of the specified value, per-
form “Idle air Volume Learning”, EC-41, before conducting
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”. For the target idle speed,
refer to the “Service Data and Specifications (SDS)”,
EC-559.
+Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B”.
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
EC-325
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NFEC0806S01
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch “ON”.
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0806S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle.
4) Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm for three seconds, then let it
idle for three seconds.
Do not rev engine to more than 3,000 rpm.
5) Perform step 4 once more.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-328.
With GST
NFEC0806S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF174Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NFEC0806S02
TESTING CONDITION:
+Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
+Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C
(14°F).
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0806S0201
1) Open engine hood.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II
5) Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-328.
With GST
NFEC0806S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-326
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0807
MEC004D
SEF625XB
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Wiring Diagram
EC-327
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0808
1 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
SEC008C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between IACV-AAC valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF343X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between IACV-AAC valve and ECM relay
©Repair harness or connectors.
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-328
3 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and IACV-AAC valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0354
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-I
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector and IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to air control valve (Power steering) at intake air duct.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence.
SEF971X
Vacuum slightly exists or does not exist.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Replace air control valve (Power steering).
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-329
5 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-II
Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence when steering wheel is turned.
SEF971X
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 6.
6 CHECK VACUUM PORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to air control valve (Power steering) at vacuum port.
3. Blow air into vacuum port.
4. Check that air flows freely.
SEF972X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Repair or clean vacuum port.
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-330
7 CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND TUBES
1. Disconnect vacuum hoses between air control valve (Power steering) and vacuum port, air control valve (Power steer-
ing) and intake air duct.
2. Check the hoses and tubes for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Repair hoses or tubes.
8 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-I
1. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between IACV-AAC valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
SEF344X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-331
9 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-II
1. Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector and ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”, and ensure the IACV-AAC valve makes operating sound according to the ignition
switch position.
SEC009C
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 11.
NG ©GO TO 10.
10 REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE
1. Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
2. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-41.
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT ©INSPECTION END
INCMP ©Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
11 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors and vacuum hoses.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Also warm up transmission to normal operating temperature.
+For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi-
cates less than 0.9V.
+For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
5. Stop vehicle with engine running.
6. Check target idle speed.
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE engine models)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE engine models)
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-41.
12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-332
SEF505V
Component Description
NFEC0809
A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position
switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open
throttle position switch is used only for A/T control.
When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle
position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only
uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunc-
tioning.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0810
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CLSD THL/P SW +Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Throttle valve: Idle position ON
Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0811
Malfunction is detected when battery voltage from the closed
throttle position switch is sent to ECM with the throttle valve
opened.
Possible Cause
NFEC0812
+Harness or connectors
(The closed throttle position switch circuit is shorted.)
+Closed throttle position switch
+Throttle position sensor
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Component Description
EC-333
SEF197Y
SEF198Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0813
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0813S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
start engine.
3) Select “CLSD THL/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
If “CLSD THL/P SW” is not available, go to step 5.
4) Check the signal under the following conditions.
Condition Signal indication
Throttle valve: Idle position ON
Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-337.
If OK, go to following step.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
THRTL POS SEN More than 2.5V
VHCL SPEED SE More than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)
will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-337.
SEF345X
Overall Function Check
NFEC0814
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed
throttle position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NFEC0814S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Check the voltage between ECM terminal 56 (Closed throttle
position switch signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
At idle: Battery voltage
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-334
At 2,000 rpm: Approximately 0V
3) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-337.
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-335
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0815
MEC005D
SEF626XC
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
EC-336
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0816
1 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
SEC001C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between throttle position switch terminal 5 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF346X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM relay
+Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM
©Repair harness or connectors.
3 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 56 and throttle position switch terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-337
4 CHECK IGNITION TIMING AND ENGINE IDLE SPEED
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-90.
MTBL0625
Models with CONSULT-II ©GO TO 6.
Models without CON-
SULT-II
©GO TO 6.
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions.
Measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
MTBL0355
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 8.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 7.
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-338
6 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
4. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions.
Resistance measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
SEC010C
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 8.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-90.
MTBL0623
Is it possible to adjust closed throttle position switch?
YesorNo
Yes (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 9.
Yes (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 9.
No ©Replace throttle position switch.
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-339
8 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditins.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
MTBL0230
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Replace throttle position sensor.
9 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SEF348X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Replace throttle position sensor.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-340
SEC220B
Component Description
NFEC0271
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connector for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0272
Malfunction is detected when ECM calculation function is
malfunctioning.
Possible Cause
NFEC0518
+ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0273
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
SEF058Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0273S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine.
4) Run engine for at least 30 seconds at idle speed.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-342.
WITH GST
NFEC0273S03
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P0605 ECM
Component Description
EC-341
NO TOOLS
NFEC0273S02
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Start engine and wait at least 30 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-342.
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0274
1 INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-341.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select MODE 4 with GST.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-341.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
No Tools
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic
Information”, EC-56, EC-59.
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-341.
4. Is the 1st trip DTC 0605 displayed again?
YesorNo
Yes [With NVIS (NATS)
system]
©GO TO 2.
Yes [Without NVIS
(NATS) system]
©GO TO 3.
No ©INSPECTION END
2 REPLACE ECM
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “NVIS
(Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)”, EC-60.
4. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-41.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT ©INSPECTION END
INCMP ©Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
DTC P0605 ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-342
3 REPLACE ECM
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-41.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT ©INSPECTION END
INCMP ©Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
DTC P0605 ECM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-343
Description
NFEC0823
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0823S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Swirl control
valve control
Swirl control valve control
solenoid valve
↓Vacuum signal
Swirl control valve actuator
↓
Swirl control valve
Ignition switch Start signal
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
This system has a swirl control valve in the intake passage of each
cylinder.
While idling and during low engine speed operation, the swirl con-
trol valve closes. Thus the velocity of the air in the intake passage
increases, promoting the vaporization of the fuel and producing a
swirl in the combustion chamber.
Because of this operation, this system tends to increase the burn-
ing speed of the gas mixture, improve fuel consumption, and
increase the stability in running conditions.
Also, except when idling and during low engine speed operation,
this system opens the swirl control valve. In this condition, this
system tends to increase power by improving intake efficiency via
reduction of intake flow resistance, intake flow.
The solenoid valve controls swirl control valve’s shut/open condi-
tion. This solenoid valve is operated by the ECM.
Throttle position
sensor (Idle posi-
tion) Engine speed Swirl control valve
control solenoid
valve Swirl control valve
ON Below 3,200 rpm ON Closed
OFF
Less than 3,200
rpm ON Closed
More than 3,600
rpm OFF Open
When engine coolant temperature is below 10°C (50°F) and above 55°C (131°F),
swirl control valve is kept open regardless of above condition.
SEF045Y
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
EC-344
SEF272X
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NFEC0823S02
Swirl Control Valve Control Solenoid Valve
NFEC0823S0201
The swirl control valve control solenoid valve responds to signals
from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the
solenoid valve is bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the
swirl control valve actuator. This operation closes the swirl control
valve. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal is
cut and the swirl control valve opens.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0824
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
SWRL CONT S/V +Engine speed: Idle
Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C
(122°F). ON
Engine coolant temperature is
above 55°C (131°F). OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0825
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
Possible Cause
NFEC0826
+Harness or connectors
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
+Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0827
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
EC-345
SEF058Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0827S04
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-348.
WITH GST
NFEC0827S05
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-346
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0828
MEC007D
SEF627XB
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
EC-347
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0829
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF069Y
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 3.
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-348
3 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF272X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+15A fuse
+Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
©Repair harness or connectors.
5 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-349
6 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF046Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF047Y
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P1131 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-350
System Description
NFEC0554
COOLING FAN CONTROL
NFEC0554S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Cooling fan
control Cooling fan
relay(s)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
Ignition switch Start signal
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refriger-
ant pressure and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
OPERATION
NFEC0554S02
VQ20DE Engine Models
NFEC0554S0203
SEF001Y
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
System Description
EC-351
VQ30DE Engine Models
NFEC0554S0204
SEF578XB
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0555
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
AIR COND SIG +Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates) ON
COOLING FAN
+After warming up engine, idle
the engine.
+Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
94°C (201°F) or less OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C
(219°F) LOW
Engine coolant temperature is
105°C (221°F) or more HIGH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0557
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
Malfunction is detected when cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat), cooling fan system does not
operate properly (Overheat) and engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
EC-352
Possible Cause
NFEC0563
+Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
+Cooling fan
+Radiator hose
+Radiator
+Radiator cap
+Water pump
+Thermostat
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF
OVERHEATING”, EC-368.
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the cool-
ant following the procedure in the MA-16, “Changing Engine
Coolant”. Also, replace the engine oil.
1) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a fill-
ing speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant
with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, “Engine
Coolant Mixture Ratio”.
2) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no
water-flow noise is emitted.
SEF621W
SEF111X
Overall Function Check
NFEC0558
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan.
During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by
turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape.
Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0558S01
1) Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, EC-357.
2) Confirm whether the customer filled the coolant or not. If the
customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to
“Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-357.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5) If the results are NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-357.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Possible Cause
EC-353
AEC640
SEC163BA
MEC475B
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
NFEC0558S03
1) Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, EC-357.
2) Confirm whether the customer filled the coolant or not. If the
customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to
“Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-357.
3) Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
4) Set temperature control lever to full cold position.
5) Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
6) Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
7) Run engine at idle for a few minutes with the air conditioner
operating.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
8) Make sure the cooling fans are operating at low speeds.
9) Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
10) Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
11) Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness con-
nector.
12) Connect 150Ωresistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
13) Restart engine and make sure the cooling fans are operating
at high speed.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
14) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-357.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
EC-354
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0559
MEC848C
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-355
MEC849C
SEF630XB
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-356
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0560
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 4.
2 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
SEC006C
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF646X
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-363.)
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-357
3 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF111X
5. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-366.)
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-358
4 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
SEC006C
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position.
4. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
5. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
SEC163BA
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-363.)
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-359
5 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
4. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Connect 150Ωresistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
6. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed.
MEC475B
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-366.)
6 CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm
2
, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
SLC754A
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following for leak.
+Hose
+Radiator
+Water pump (Refer to LC-12, “Water Pump”.)
©Repair or replace.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-360
8 CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure.
SLC755A
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm
2
,9-14psi)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace radiator cap.
9 CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
SLC343
Valve opening temperature:
82°C (180°F) [standard]
Valve lift:
More than 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to LC-16, “Thermostat”.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Replace thermostat.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-361
10 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
2. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 11.
NG ©Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
11 CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-368.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-362
PROCEDURE A
=NFEC0560S01
1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF590X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+15A fuse
+40A fusible links
+Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
+Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-363
3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
SEC007C
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cooling fan
motor-1 terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cooling fan
motor-2 terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E8, F17
+Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-364
6 CHECKCOOLINGFANRELAY-1
Checkcontinuitybetweencoolingfanrelay-1terminals3and5,6and7underthefollowingconditions.
SEF591X
OKorNG
OK © GOTO7.
NG © Replacecoolingfanrelay.
7 CHECKCOOLINGFANMOTORS-1AND-2
Supplybatteryvoltagebetweenthefollowingterminalsandcheckoperation.
SEF592X
OKorNG
OK © GOTO8.
NG © Replacecoolingfanmotors.
8 CHECKINTERMITTENTINCIDENT
Perform“TROUBLEDIAGNOSISFORINTERMITTENTINCIDENT”,EC-126..
© INSPECTIONEND
DTCP1217ENGINEOVERTEMPERATURE(OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-365
PROCEDURE B
NFEC0560S02
1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF593X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fuse
+Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fusible link
©Repair harness or connectors.
3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-2
terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 6 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-3
terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 6 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 34 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-366
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E8, E17
+Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3
Check continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.
SEF591X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Replace cooling fan relays.
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation.
SEF592X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Replace cooling fan motors.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
1. Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-367
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
NFEC0561
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 +Blocked radiator
+Blocked condenser
+Blocked radiator grille
+Blocked bumper
+Visual No blocking —
2+Coolant mixture +Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-13, “RECOM-
MENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”.
3+Coolant level +Visual Coolant up to MAX level
in reservoir tank and
radiator filler neck
See MA-16, “Changing
Engine Coolant”.
4+Radiator cap +Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa
(0.59 - 1.0 bar, 0.6 - 1.0
kg/cm
2
,9-14psi) (Limit)
See LC-11, “System
Check”.
ON*
2
5+Coolant leaks +Visual No leaks See LC-11, “System
Check”.
ON*
2
6+Thermostat +Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses Both hoses should be
hot See LC-16, “Thermostat”
and LC-18, “Radiator”.
ON*
1
7+Cooling fan +CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1217 (EC-351).
OFF 8 +Combustion gas leak +Color checker chemi-
cal tester 4 Gas ana-
lyzer
Negative —
ON*
3
9+Coolant temperature
gauge
+Visual Gauge less than 3/4
when driving —
+Coolant overflow to
reservoir tank
+Visual No overflow during driv-
ing and idling See MA-16, “Changing
Engine Coolant”.
OFF*
4
10 +Coolant return from
reservoir tank to radia-
tor
+Visual Should be initial level in
reservoir tank See MA-15, “ENGINE
MAINTENANCE”.
OFF 11 +Cylinder head +Straight gauge feeler
gauge 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi-
mum distortion (warping) See EM-40, “Inspection”.
12 +Cylinder block and
pistons
+Visual No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston See EM-60, “Inspection”.
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to LC-23, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”.
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
EC-368
Component Description
NFEC0830
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
NFEC0830S01
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
SEF274XA
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0831
Malfunction is detected when the ignition signal in the primary cir-
cuit is not sent to ECM during engine cranking or running.
Possible Cause
NFEC0832
+Harness or connectors (The ignition primary circuit is open or
shorted.)
+Power transistor unit built into ignition coil
+Condenser
+Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
+Crankshaft position sensor (REF) circuit
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0833
NOTE:
+If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
+If DTC P1320 is displayed with DTC P0340, P1335 or
P1336, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0340, P1335 or
P1336 first. Refer to EC-303, EC-380 or EC-387.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0833S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
EC-369
3) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to
“START” for at least 5 seconds.)
4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-374.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
NFEC0833S03
1) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to
“START” for at least 5 seconds.)
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-374.
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-370
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0834
MEC050D
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
EC-371
MEC752C
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-372
MEC753C
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-373
SEF860Y
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0835
1 CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
YesorNo
Yes (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 12.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Search for circuit which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop.
SEF190Y
©GO TO 12.
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-374
3 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF366X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Go to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY, EC-127.
4 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
SEF275X
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF367X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©GO TO 5.
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-375
5 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEF589PB
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©GO TO 6.
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F18, E15
+Harness for open or short between ECM relay and condenser
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF368X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 8.
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+15A fuse
+Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
©Repair or replace harness or connectors.
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-376
9 CHECK ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
SEF296X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 17.
NG ©Replace ECM relay.
10 CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 11.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
11 CHECK CONDENSER
Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
SEF369X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©Replace condenser.
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-377
12 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
SEF274XA
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF370X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 14.
NG ©GO TO 13.
13 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F18.
©Repair or replace harness or connectors.
14 CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 15.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-378
15 CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 30, 31, 32 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 16.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
16 CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Check resistance between ignition coil terminals 2 and 3.
SEF371X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 17.
NG ©Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-379
SEF253P
Component Description
NFEC0573
The crankshaft position sensor (REF) is located on the oil pan
(upper) facing the crankshaft pulley. It detects the TDC (Top Dead
Center) signal (120° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the
crankshaft pulley will periodically change. Permeability near the
sensor also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the TDC signal
(120° signal).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0574
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CKPS·RPM (POS) +Tachometer: Connect
+Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
value.
Almost the same speed as the
CONSULT-II value.
ENG SPEED
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0576
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) 120° signal is not entered to ECM for the first few
seconds during engine cranking,
(Malfunction B) 120° signal is not entered to ECM during engine
running,
(Malfunction C) 120° signal cycle excessively changes during
engine running.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
NFEC0576S01
When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MI illuminates.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
circuit Compression TDC signal (120° signal) is controlled by camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
signal and crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal. Ignition timing will be delayed 0° to 2°.
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Component Description
EC-380
Possible Cause
NFEC0577
+Harness or connectors
(The crankshaft position sensor (REF) circuit is open or
shorted.)
+Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
+Starter motor (Refer to SC section.)
+Starting system circuit (Refer to SC section.)
+Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0578
NOTE:
+Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C”.
+If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
SEF065Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NFEC0578S01
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0578S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-384.
With GST
NFEC0578S0103
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
No Tools
NFEC0578S0102
1) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-384.
SEF058Y
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C
NFEC0578S02
With CONSULT-II
NFEC0578S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-384.
With GST
NFEC0578S0203
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Possible Cause
EC-381
No Tools
NFEC0578S0202
1) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II” (Self-diagnostic results) with
ECM.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-384.
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-382
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0579
MEC047D
SEF861Y
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Wiring Diagram
EC-383
Diagnostic Procedure
=NFEC0580
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK CKPS (REF) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (REF) harness connector.
SEF591PA
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 65, 75 and CKPS (REF) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F43, F191
+Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (REF) and ECM
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-384
4 CHECK CKPS (REF) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (REF) terminal 1 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F43, F191
+Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (REF) and engine ground
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
6 CHECK CKPS (REF)-I
1. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the CKPS (REF).
2. Visually check the CKPS (REF) for chipping.
SEF585P
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
7 CHECK CKPS (REF)-II
Check resistance between CKPS (REF) terminals 1 and 2.
SEF350X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-385
8 CHECK CKPS (REF) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect harness connectors F43, F191.
3. Check harness continuity between harness connector F43 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©GO TO 9.
9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F43, F191
+Joint connector-18
+Harness for open or short between harness connector F43 and engine ground
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-386
SEF254P
Component Description
NFEC0292
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects
the crankshaft position signal (1° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the gear
teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor
also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft
position signal (1° signal).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0581
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CKPS·RPM (POS) +Tachometer: Connect
+Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
value.
Almost the same speed as the
CONSULT-II value.
ENG SPEED
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0294
Malfunction is detected when chipping of the signal plate (flywheel
or drive plate) gear tooth (cog) is detected by the ECM.
Possible Cause
NFEC0582
+Harness or connectors
+Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
+Signal plate (Drive plate/Flywheel)
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Component Description
EC-387
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0295
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V.
SEF058Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0295S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and run it for at least 70 seconds at idle speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-390.
WITH GST
NFEC0295S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
EC-388
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0296
MEC850C
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Wiring Diagram
EC-389
SEF856Y
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0297
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCERWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 2.
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-390
2 CHECK CKPS (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
SEF511WB
2. Check voltage between harness connector F25 terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF323X
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F25, F171
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
+Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4 CHECK CKPS (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-391
5 CHECK CKPS (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 85 and harness connector F25 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK CKPS (POS) SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (POS) harness connector.
SEF367Q
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (POS) terminals and harness connector F171 terminals as follows.
MTBL0352
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK CKPS (POS) INSTALLATION
Check that CKPS (POS) and HO2S1 bank 2 harness clamp are installed correctly as shown below.
SEM222FE
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Install CKPS (POS) correctly.
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-392
8 CHECK IMPROPER INSTALLATION
1. Loosen and retighten the fixing bolt of the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-388 again.
Is a 1st trip DTC P1336 detected?
Yes ©GO TO 9.
No ©INSPECTION END
9 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
SEF587P
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
10 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 85 and ground by briefly touching the sensor core with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SEF324X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 11.
NG ©Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-393
11 CHECK CKPS (POS) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 13.
NG ©GO TO 12.
12 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F25, F171
+Joint connector-18
+Harness for open or short between harness connector F25 and engine ground
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
13 CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate (flywheel or drive plate) gear tooth (cog).
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 14.
NG ©Replace the signal plate (flywheel or drive plate).
14 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-394
Component Description
NFEC0849
The malfunction information related to A/T (Automatic Transmission) is transferred through the line (circuit)
from TCM (Transmission control module) to ECM. Therefore, be sure to erase the malfunction information such
as DTC not only in TCM (Transmission control module) but also ECM after the A/T related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0850
Malfunction is detected when an incorrect signal from TCM (Trans-
mission control module) is sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
NFEC0851
+Harness or connectors
[The communication line circuit between ECM and TCM
(Transmission control module) is open or shorted.]
+Dead (Weak) battery
+TCM (Transmission control module)
SEF058Y
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0852
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0852S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-397.
WITH GST
NFEC0852S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Component Description
EC-395
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0853
MEC009D
SEF048YA
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram
EC-396
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0854
1 CHECK A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission Control Module) harness connector.
SEF270X
SEF271X
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 60 and TCM terminal 15. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 2.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-397
AEC877A
Component Description
NFEC0855
When the gear position is “P” (A/T models only) or “N”, park/neutral
position (PNP) switch is “ON”.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the
“ON” signal) exists.
For A/T models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly
also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever
position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0856
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
P/N POSI SW +Ignition switch: ON Shift lever: “P” or “N” ON
Except above OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
NFEC0857
Malfunction is detected when the signal of the park/neutral position
(PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and
driving.
Possible Cause
NFEC0858
+Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or
shorted.]
+Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure
NFEC0859
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Component Description
EC-398
SEF212Y
SEF213Y
WITH CONSULT-II
NFEC0859S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
“N” and “P” position ON
Except the above position OFF
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-401.
If OK, go to following step.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive
seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 4,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2 - 10 msec
VHCL SPEED SE More than 65 km/h (40 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-401.
SEF359X
Overall Function Check
NFEC0860
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral
position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
NFEC0860S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Check voltage between ECM terminal 44 and body ground
under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known good data)
“P” and “N” position Approx. 0
Except the above position Battery voltage
3) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-401.
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-399
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0861
MEC212D
SEF635XC
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
EC-400
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0862
FOR M/T MODELS
NFEC0862S01
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
AEC877A
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 2.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44 and PNP switch terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Refer to MT-9, “Position Switch Check”.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
4 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-401
FOR A/T MODELS
=NFEC0862S02
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
SEF279X
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F10, F151
+Harness for open or short between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and engine ground
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
3 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F10, F151
+Harness for open or short between ECM and park/neutral position (PNP) switch
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Refer to AT-125, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-402
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-403
SEF052V
SEF946SA
Component Description
NFEC0644
The absolute pressure sensor detects ambient barometric pressure
and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure
increases, the voltage rises.
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
EC-404
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0648
MEC049D
SEF651XB
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-405
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0647
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 80 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF055Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 3.
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-406
3 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect absolute pressure sensor harness connector.
SEF257X
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair or replace harness connector.
4 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between absolute pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF299X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair harness or connectors.
5 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between absolute pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©GO TO 6.
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-407
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness for open or short between ECM and absolute pressure sensor
+Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and absolute pressure sensor
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 80 and absolute pressure sensor terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.
SEF300XB
CAUTION:
+Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
+Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–933 bar, –700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (1,013 bar, 760 mmHg,
29.92 inHg) of pressure.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace absolute pressure sensor.
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-408
9 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 2 and ground
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-409
SEF258X
SEF012P
Component Description
NFEC0064
The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct hous-
ing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a sig-
nal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
<Reference data>
Intake air
temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 1.23 0.27 - 0.38
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 64
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description
EC-410
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0067
MEC064D
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-411
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0068
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 64 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF004Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect intake air temperature sensor harness connector.
SEF258X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground.
SEF301X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-412
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E8, F17
+Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor
©Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E8, F17
+Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor
+Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and intake air temperature sensor
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF302X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Replace intake air temperature sensor.
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-413
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-414
SEF463R
SEF288D
Component Description
NFEC0108
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a closed-end
tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0109
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR
(B1)
HO2S1 MNTR
(B2)
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Component Description
EC-415
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0114
BANK 1
NFEC0114S01
MEC306D
SEF854YC
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-416
BANK 2
NFEC0114S02
MEC307D
SEF855YC
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-417
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0115
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make sure that the monitors fluctuate between LEAN and
RICH more than five times in 10 seconds.
SEF155Z
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Set ECM in “Diagnostic test mode II [Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)]”. Refer to “How to Switch Diagnostic Test
Modes”, EC-62.
4. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make sure that the MI comes ON more than five times in 10
seconds.
SAT652J
5. Switch the monitored sensor. Refer to “How to Switch Monitored Sensor from Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa”, EC-64.
6. Perform step 4 again.
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-418
4 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 5.
5 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
©GO TO 6.
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) HARNESS PROTECTOR COLOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector.
SEF505YA
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF902XA
©GO TO 7.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-419
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0511
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S1 (front) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0512
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 9.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 10.
NG ©GO TO 11.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-420
9 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
6. Check the following.
+“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.
SEF647YA
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
+“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©GO TO 11.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-421
10 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and set ECM in diagnostic test mode-II [Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor (front)].
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) or 62 (HO2S1 bank 1 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF039YA
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©GO TO 11.
11 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner and
approved anti-seize lubricant. Refer to “Commercial Service Tools”, EC-18.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-422
12 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 13.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
13 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-423
Description
NFEC0123
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0123S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater
(front) control
Heated oxygen sensor 1
heater (front)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION
NFEC0123S02
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0124
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
+Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
+Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Description
EC-424
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0128
BANK 1
NFEC0128S01
MEC308D
SEF655XE
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Wiring Diagram
EC-425
BANK 2
NFEC0128S02
MEC309D
SEF656XE
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-426
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0129
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Set the tester probe between ECM terminals 3 (HO2S1 heater bank 1 signal), 2 (HO2S1 heater bank 2 signal) and
ground.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
SEF007Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-427
2 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connector.
SEF902XA
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between HO2S1 (front) terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF311X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
+15A fuse
+Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) and fuse
©Repair harness or connectors.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-428
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT) OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 (front) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0624
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Check resistance between HO2S1 (front) terminals as follows.
SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©GO TO 6.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-429
6 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (FRONT)
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness protector color.
SEF505YA
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner and
approved anti-seize lubricant. Refer to “Commercial Service Tools”, EC-18.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER (FRONT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-430
SEF327R
Component Description
NFEC0146
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst
(Manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each
bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0147
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
+Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle up to
2,000 rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) LEAN ←→ RICH
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Component Description
EC-431
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0152
BANK 1
NFEC0152S01
MEC310D
SEF657XE
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Wiring Diagram
EC-432
BANK 2
NFEC0152S02
MEC311D
SEF658XE
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-433
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0153
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1. Start engine and drive the vehicle at over 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle and keep the engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal), 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and ground.
4. Check the voltage while revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release the accelerator pedal as quickly as possible.)
SEF008Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Keep engine at idle for 10 minutes, then check the voltage between ECM terminals 71, 72 and ground, or check the volt-
age when coasting at 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
SEF008Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 3.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-434
3 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 4.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-435
4 CHECK HEATED OXYTEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0504
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or HO2S2 (rear) terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0505
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-436
5 CHECK HEATED OXYTEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 7.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-
II.
4. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF066Y
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©GO TO 9.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-437
7 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (HO2S2 bank 1 signal) or 71 (HO2S2 bank 2 signal) and engine
ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
SEF313XB
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©GO TO 8.
8 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)-II
Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position (M/T), “D” position with “OD” OFF (A/T).
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©GO TO 9.
9 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner and
approved anti-seize lubricant. Refer to “Commercial Service Tools”, EC-18.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-438
10 CHECK REAR HO2S SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following.
+Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
+Joint connector
(Refer to EL-377, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 11.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
11 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-439
Description
NFEC0162
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0162S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (rear) control Heated oxygen sensor
2 heater (rear)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION
NFEC0162S02
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0163
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
+Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
+Engine is running above 3,600 rpm. OFF
+Engine is running below 3,600 rpm after driving for 2 minutes at a
speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more. ON
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Description
EC-440
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0167
BANK 1
NFEC0167S01
MEC312D
SEF659XE
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Wiring Diagram
EC-441
BANK 2
NFEC0167S02
MEC313D
SEF660XE
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-442
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0168
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive the vehicle at over 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle and keep the engine running.
3. Set the voltmeter probe between ECM terminals 5 (HO2S2 heater bank 1 signal), 4 (HO2S2 heater bank 2 signal) and
ground.
4. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
SEF010Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-443
2 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
3. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector.
SEF467WB
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between HO2S2 (rear) terminal 3 and ground.
SEF314X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
+15A fuse
+Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) and fuse
©Repair harness or connectors.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-444
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR) OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 (rear) terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0506
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Check the resistance between HO2S2 (rear) terminals as follows.
SEF315X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©GO TO 6.
6 REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (REAR)
Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) harness protector color.
SEF154Z
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner and
approved anti-seize lubricant. Refer to “Commercial Service Tools”, EC-18.
©Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-445
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER (REAR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-446
SEF263X
Component Description
NFEC0177
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tem-
perature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF012P
<Reference data>
Fuel temperature
°C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 92
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description
EC-447
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0180
MEC051D
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-448
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0181
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 92 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF042Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
SEF263X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF586X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-449
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors B3, M6 or B2, M2
+Harness connectors M81, F49
+Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
©Repair harness or connector.
4 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.
SEF587X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Replace fuel level sensor unit.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-450
SEF254P
Component Description
NFEC0191
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects
the crankshaft position signal (1° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the gear
teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor
also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft
position signal (1° signal).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0492
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CKPS·RPM (POS)
+Tachometer: Connect
+Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CON-
SULT-II value.
Almost the same speed as the
CONSULT-II value.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Component Description
EC-451
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0195
MEC906C
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-452
SEF856Y
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0196
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “POS COUNT” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Check the “POS COUNT” indication.
SEF011Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-453
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 85 and ground.
SEF012Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
4 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SEF255X
©GO TO 5.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-454
5 CHECK CKPS (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
SEF511WB
2. Check voltage between harness connector F25 terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF323X
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©GO TO 6.
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F25, F171
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
+Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK CKPS (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-455
8 CHECK CKPS (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 85 and harness connector F25 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9 CHECK CKPS (POS) SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (POS) harness connector.
SEF367Q
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (POS) terminals and harness connector F171 terminals as follows.
MTBL0352
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK CKPS (POS) INSTALLATION
Check that CKPS (POS) and HO2S1 bank 2 harness clamp are installed correctly as shown below.
SEM222FE
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 11.
NG ©Install CKPS (POS) correctly.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-456
11 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
SEF587P
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
12 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II
1. Reconnect disconnected harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 85 and ground by briefly touching the sensor core with a flat-bladed screwdriv-
ers.
SEF324X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 13.
NG ©Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
13 CHECK CKPS (POS) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 15.
NG ©GO TO 14.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-457
14 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F25, F171
+Joint connector-18
+Harness for open or short between harness connector F25 and engine ground
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
15 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-458
Description
NFEC0221
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0221S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
EVAP canister
purge flow con-
trol
EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch Start signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Throttle position switch Closed throttle position
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by consider-
ing various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.
SEF337U
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NFEC0221S02
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0222
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PURG VOL C/V
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle (Vehicle stopped) 0%
2,000 rpm —
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
EC-459
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0226
MEC070D
SEF858Y
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
EC-460
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0227
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at the EVAP
canister.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and let it idle.
5. Change the valve opening percentage “Qu” and “Qd” and check for vacuum existence under the following conditions.
SEF156Z
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 5.
3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at the EVAP
canister.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
4. Check for vacuum existence at the EVAP purge hose under the following conditions.
SEF019Y
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 5.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-461
4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove EVAP canister.
3. Block port B of EVAP canister.
4. Blow air through port A orally, and confirm that air flows freely through port C with check valve resistance.
5. Block port A of EVAP canister.
6. Blow air through port B orally, and confirm that air flows freely through port C.
SEF917W
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©Replace EVAP canister.
5 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF266X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or
tester.
SEF998X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©GO TO 6.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-462
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
+15A fuse
+Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
©Repair harness or connectors.
7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 8.
OK (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 9.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connetors.
8 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
SEF677Y
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©GO TO 9.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-463
9 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF334X
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SEF335X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-464
AEC110
Component Description
=NFEC0242
The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a
pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the
speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Component Description
EC-465
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0247
MEC052D
SEF859Y
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-466
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0248
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Lift up the vehicle.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Select “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check “VHCL SPEED SE” indication when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
SEF020Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Lift up the vehicle.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminal 86 and ground with an oscilloscope.
5. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows a signal wave as shown below under the following conditions.
SEF021Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-467
4 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 86 and combination meter terminal 32.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION
Make sure that speedometer functions properly.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M15, E81
+Harness for open or short between combination meter and ABS actuator and electric unit
OK or NG
OK ©Check combination meter and ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to EL or BR section.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-468
Description
NFEC0249
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0249S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Idle air control IACV-AAC valve
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition switch Start signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Park/neutral position
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal
Battery Battery voltage
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Ambient air temperature switch Ambient air temperature
Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature
Absolute pressure sensor Ambient barometic pressure
This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified
level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the
amount of air which by-passes the throttle valve via IACV-AAC
valve. The IACV-AAC valve changes the opening of the air by-pass
passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actu-
ated by a step motor built into the valve, which moves the valve in
the axial direction in steps corresponding to the ECM output sig-
nals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respec-
tive opening of the air by-pass passage. (i.e. when the step
advances, the opening is enlarged.) The opening of the valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The
crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed
and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the step
position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with
the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the
lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The opti-
mum value stored in the ECM is determined by takig into consid-
eration various engine conditions, such as during warm up,
deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and
cooling fan operation).
NOTE:
If engine idle speed is out of the specified value, perform “Idle
Air Volume Learning”, EC-41. For the target idle speed, refer
to “Service Data and specifications (SDS)”, EC-559.
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE
Description
EC-469
SEF765P
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NFEC0249S02
IACV-AAC Valve
NFEC0249S0201
The IACV-AAC valve is operated by a step motor for centralized
control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases
and is actuated by the output signals of ECM which turns ON and
OFF two windings each in seqeunce. Each time the IACV-AAC
valve opens or closes to change tha auxiliary air quantity, the ECM
sends a pulse signal to the step motor. When no change in the
auxiliary air quantity is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse
signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains
at that particular opening.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0250
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
IACV-AAC/V
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 2 - 10 step
2,000 rpm —
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
EC-470
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0254
MEC071D
SEF625XB
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE
Wiring Diagram
EC-471
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0255
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 6, 7, 8, 17 (IACV-AAC valve signal) and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”, wait at least 5 seconds and then “OFF”.
4. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below at least once every 10 seconds after turning
ignition switch “OFF”.
SEF022Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
SEC008C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between IACV-AAC valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF343X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-472
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between IACV-AAC valve and ECM relay
©Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and IACV-AAC valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0354
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-I
1. Reconnect the ECM harness connector and IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose connected to the air control valve (Power steering) at the intake air duct.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence.
SEF971X
Vacuum slightly exists or does not exist.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Replace air control valve (Power steering).
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-473
6 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-II
Check the vacuum hose for vacuum existence when steering wheel is turned.
SEF971X
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 CHECK VACUUM PORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose connected to the air control valve (Power steering) at the vacuum port.
3. Blow air into vacuum port.
4. Check that air flows freely.
SEF972X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Repair or clean vacuum port.
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-474
8 CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND TUBES
1. Disconnect vacuum hoses between the air control valve (Power steering) and vacuum port, air control valve (Power
steering) and air duct.
2. Check hoses and tubes for cracks, clogging, improper connection or disconnection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Repair hoses or tubes.
9 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-I
1. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between IACV-AAC valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
SEF344X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-475
10 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-II
1. Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector and ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”, and ensure the IACV-AAC valve makes operating sound according to the ignition
switch position.
SEC009C
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©GO TO 11.
11 REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE
1. Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
2. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-41.
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT ©INSPECTION END
INCMP ©Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
12 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors and vacuum hoses.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Also warm up transmission to normal operating temperature.
+For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi-
cates less than 0.9V.
+For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
5. Stop vehicle with engine running.
6. Check target idle speed.
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE engine models)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE engine models)
A/T: 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 13.
NG ©Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-41.
13 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-476
SEF505V
Component Description
NFEC0256
A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position
switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open
throttle position switch is used only for A/T control.
When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle
position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only
uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunc-
tioning.
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Component Description
EC-477
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0262
MEC072D
SEF626XD
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
EC-478
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0263
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check the voltage between ECM terminal 56 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF023Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
SEC001C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between throttle position switch terminal 5 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF346X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-479
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM relay
+Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM
©Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 56 and throttle position switch terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector and throttle position switch harness connector.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
5. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions.
Resistance measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
SEC010C
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©GO TO 6.
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-480
6 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-90.
MTBL0623
Is it possible to adjust closed throttle position switch?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 1.
No ©Replace throttle position switch.
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-481
System Description
NFEC0264
These circuit lines are used to control the smooth shifting up and down of A/T during the hard acceleration/
deceleration.
Voltage signals are exchanged between ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module).
A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
System Description
EC-482
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0269
MEC073D
SEF043YA
A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram
EC-483
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0270
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check the voltage between ECM terminals 36, 37, 68, 77, 78 and ground.
SEF024Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-484
2 CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission Control Module) harness connector.
SEF044Y
SEF271X
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
MTBL0405
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Repair harness or connectors.
3 CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 36, 37, 68, 77, 78 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectos.
4 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-485
Description
NFEC0523
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0523S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Swirl control
valve control
Swirl control valve control
solenoid valve
↓Vacuum signal
Swirl control valve actuator
↓
Swirl control valve
Ignition switch Start signal
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
This system has a swirl control valve in the intake passage of each
cylinder.
While idling and during low engine speed operation, the swirl con-
trol valve closes. Thus the velocity of the air in the intake passage
increases, promoting the vaporization of the fuel and producing a
swirl in the combustion chamber.
Because of this operation, this system tends to increase the burn-
ing speed of the gas mixture, improve fuel consumption, and
increase the stability in running conditions.
Also, except when idling and during low engine speed operation,
this system opens the swirl control valve. In this condition, this
system tends to increase power by improving intake efficiency via
reduction of intake flow resistance, intake flow.
The solenoid valve controls swirl control valve’s shut/open condi-
tion. This solenoid valve is operated by the ECM.
Throttle position
sensor (Idle posi-
tion) Engine speed Swirl control valve
control solenoid
valve Swirl control valve
ON Below 3,200 rpm ON Closed
OFF
Less than 3,200
rpm ON Closed
More than 3,600
rpm OFF Open
When engine coolant temperature is below 10°C (50°F) and above 55°C (131°F),
swirl control valve is kept open regardless of above condition.
SEF045Y
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
EC-486
SEF272X
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NFEC0523S02
Swirl Control Valve Control Solenoid Valve
NFEC0523S0201
The swirl control valve control solenoid valve responds to signals
from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the
solenoid valve is bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the
swirl control valve actuator. This operation closes the swirl control
valve. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal is
cut and the swirl control valve opens.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0524
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
SWRL CONT S/V +Engine speed: Idle
Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C
(122°F). ON
Engine coolant temperature is
above 55°C (131°F). OFF
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
EC-487
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0529
MEC074D
SEF627XB
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
EC-488
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0530
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” alternately on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Make sure the swirl control valve actuator rod moves according to “SWIRL CONT SOL/V”.
SEF621X
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-489
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Confirm that the voltage between ECM terminal 70 (Engine coolant temperature sensor signal) and ground is more
than 2.72V. If the voltage is out of range, cool the engine down.
SEF016Y
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Make sure the swirl control valve actuator rod moves when revving to over 3,200 rpm from idle.
SEF621X
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 5.
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-490
4 CHECK VACUUM SOURCE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose connected to the swirl control valve actuator at vacuum tank.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” alternately on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
SEF026Y
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 7.
5 CHECK VACUUM SOURCE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect the swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose connected to the swirl control valve actuator at vacuum tank.
4. Start engine and let it idle.
5. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
6. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
SEF027Y
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 8.
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-491
6 CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND TUBES
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove vacuum hoses between the swirl control valve actuator and the vacuum tank.
3. Check hoses and tubes for cracks, clogging, improper connection or disconnection.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK ©Repair or replace swirl control valve actuator.
NG ©Repair or replace vacuum hoses or tubes.
7 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” alternately on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF069Y
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 11.
NG ©GO TO 8.
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-492
8 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF272X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF619X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©GO TO 9.
9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+15A fuse
+Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
©Repair harness or connectors.
10 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 11.
NG ©Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-493
11 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF046Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.
SEF047Y
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©Replace intake manifold collector assembly.
12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-494
Component Description
NFEC0863
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
NFEC0863S01
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
SEF274XA
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
EC-495
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0864
MEC075D
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
EC-496
MEC076D
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-497
MEC077D
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-498
SEF860Y
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0865
1 INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
YesorNo
Yes (With CONSULT-II) ©GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-
II)
©GO TO 3.
No ©GO TO 4.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that all circuits do not produce a momentary engine speed drop.
SEF070Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 13.
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-499
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 30, 31, 32 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below.
SEF071Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 13.
4 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF366X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Go to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY, EC-127.
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-500
5 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
SEF275X
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF367X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 11.
NG ©GO TO 6.
6 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEF589PB
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-501
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F18, E15
+Harness for open or short between ECM relay and condenser
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF368X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©GO TO 9.
9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+15A fuse
+Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
©Repair or replace harness or connectors.
10 CHECK ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
SEF296X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 18.
NG ©Replace ECM relay.
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-502
11 CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
12 CHECK CONDENSER
Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
SEF369X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 13.
NG ©Replace condenser.
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-503
13 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
SEF274XA
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF370X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 15.
NG ©GO TO 14.
14 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F18.
©Repair or replace harness or connectors.
15 CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 16.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-504
16 CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 30, 31, 32 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 17.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
17 CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Check resistance between ignition coil terminals 2 and 3.
SEF371X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 18.
NG ©Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
18 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-505
Component Description
NFEC0361
The malfunction information related to A/T (Automatic Transmission) is transferred through the line (circuit)
from TCM (Transmission control module) to ECM.
A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Component Description
EC-506
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0365
MEC078D
SEF048YA
A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram
EC-507
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0366
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check the voltage between ECM terminal 60 and ground.
SEF025Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission Control Module) harness connector.
SEF044Y
SEF271X
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 60 and TCM terminal 15. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 3.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-508
3 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-509
AEC877A
Component Description
NFEC0367
When the gear position is “P” (A/T models only) or “N”, park/neutral
position (PNP) switch is “ON”.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the
“ON” signal) exists.
For A/T models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly
also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever
position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0368
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
P/N POSI SW +Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: “P” or “N” (A/T models)
Neutral (M/T models) ON
Except above OFF
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Component Description
EC-510
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0373
MEC053D
SEF635XC
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
EC-511
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0374
FOR M/T MODELS
NFEC0374S01
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
SEF049Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 44 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF050Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-512
4 CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
AEC877A
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44 and PNP switch terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Refer to MT-9, “Position Switch Check”.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-513
FOR A/T MODELS
=NFEC0374S02
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
SEF028Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 44 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF029Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-514
4 CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
SEF279X
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F10, F151
+Harness for open or short between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and engine ground
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F10, F151
+Harness for open or short between ECM and park/neutral position (PNP) switch
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Refer to AT-125, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-515
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-516
Description
NFEC0596
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NFEC0596S01
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
VIAS control VIAS control solenoid valve
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Closed throttle position Throttle valve idle position
Ignition switch Start signal
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
SEF599X
When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power
valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective suction port
length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collec-
tor’s suction port including the intake valve. This long suction port
provides increased air intake which results in improved suction
efficiency and higher torque generation.
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is
running at high speed, the ECM sends the signal to the VIAS con-
trol solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold
vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore opens the
power valve to two suction passages together in the collector.
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the
length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder.
This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with
reduced suction resistance under high speeds.
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description
EC-517
SEF600X
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NFEC0596S02
Power Valve
NFEC0596S0201
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used
to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control
system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the
power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge
tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS con-
trol solenoid valve.
SEF288X
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
NFEC0596S0202
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description (Cont’d)
EC-518
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0597
MEC862C
SEF636XB
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Wiring Diagram
EC-519
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0598
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
SEC236C
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
SEF052Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-520
2 CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEF288X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF603X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+15A fuse
+Harness continuity between fuse and VIAS control solenoid valve
©Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-521
5 RETEST OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform Test No. 1 again.
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 6.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
OK or NG
OK ©Replace VIAS control solenoid valve as intake manifold collector assembly.
NG ©Repair or replace harness or connectors.
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-522
SEF812J
Component Description
NFEC0383
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel
needs.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0384
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
INJ PULSE-B2
INJ PULSE-B1
+Engine: After warming up
+Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
+Shift lever: “N”
+No-load
Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.8 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL ditto Idle 2.0 - 3.2 msec
2,000 rpm 1.4 - 2.6 msec
INJECTOR
Component Description
EC-523
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0386
MEC863C
SEF862Y
INJECTOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-524
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0387
1 INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to “START”.
Is any cylinder ignited?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF070Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 3.
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-525
3 CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect injector harness connectors (bank 2) and harness connectors F43, F191 (bank 1).
SEF276X
SEF281XA
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground, harness connector F43 terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II
or tester.
SEF897X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©GO TO 4.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Harness connectors F43, F191
+Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
+10A fuse
+Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
+Harness for open or short between harness connector F43 and fuse
©Repair harness or connectors.
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-526
5 CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 103, 104, 107, harness connector F191 termi-
nals 6, 2, 1 and ECM terminals 101, 105, 102. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 7.
NG ©GO TO 6.
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F43, F191
+Harness for open or short between harness connector F191 and ECM
+Harness for open or short between ECM and injector
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7 CHECK SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT (BANK 1)
1. Remove intake manifold collector.
2. Disconnect injector harness connectors (bank 1).
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
MTBL0359
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
SEF964XA
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace injector.
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-527
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-528
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0388
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
START SIGNAL +Ignition switch: ON →START →ON OFF →ON →OFF
START SIGNAL
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
EC-529
Wiring Diagram
=NFEC0390
MEC864C
SEF638XB
START SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
EC-530
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0391
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF072Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 42 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF362X
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
4 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then turn it to “START”.
Does starter motor operate?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 5.
No ©Refer to SC-12, “STARTING SYSTEM”.
START SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-531
5 CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect 10A fuse.
3. Check if 10A fuse is OK.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Replace 10A fuse.
6 CHECK START SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect ignition switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 42 and fuse block, ignition switch and fuse block. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Fuse block (J/B) connectors M17, E83
+Harness for open or short between ignition switch and fuse
+Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
START SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-532
System Description
NFEC0392
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Fuel pump control Fuel pump relayCrankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Ignition switch Start signal
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a 120° signal from the crankshaft position sensor (REF), it knows that the
engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the 120° signal is not received when the ignition switch
is on, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving
safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn
controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
SEF605X
Component Description
NFEC0393
The fuel pump with a fuel damper is an in-tank type (the pump and
damper are located in the fuel tank).
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0394
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
FUEL PUMP RLY
+Ignition switch is turned to ON. (Operates for 1 second.)
+Engine running and cranking ON
Except as shown above OFF
FUEL PUMP
System Description
EC-533
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0396
MEC048D
SEF639XB
FUEL PUMP
Wiring Diagram
EC-534
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0397
1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
SEC013C
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned “ON”.
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay.
SEF284X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF310Y
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-535
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Fuse block (J/B) connector B5
+10A fuse
+15A fuse
+Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay
©Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
SEF263X
3. Check harness continuity between fuel pump terminal 3 and body ground, fuel pump terminal 1 and fuel pump relay
terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and fuel pump
+Harness for open or short between fuel pump and body ground
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 28 and fuel pump relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors B3, M6 or B4, M3
+Harness connectors M81, F49
+Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-536
8 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect fuel pump relay, fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector and ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Turn fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and check operating sound.
SEF073Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.
SEF367Z
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace fuel pump relay.
9 CHECK FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 1 and 3.
SEF609X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 10.
NG ©Replace fuel pump.
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-537
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-538
System Description
NFEC0599
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)
Engine mount
control Electronic controlled
engine mount
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to
the engine speed and the vehicle speed. The control system has
2-step control [soft/hard].
Vehicle condition Engine mount control
Idle (with vehicle stopped) Soft
Driving Hard
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0600
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ENGINE MOUNT +Engine: Running Idle “IDLE”
2,000 rpm “TRVL”
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
System Description
EC-539
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0602
MEC866C
SEF640XB
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Wiring Diagram
EC-540
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0603
1 CHECK THE OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. After warming up engine, run it at idle speed.
2. Shift selector lever to “D” range while depressing the brake pedal and pulling the parking brake control lever.
3. Perform “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and check that the body vibration changes
according to switching the condition (With vehicle stopped).
SEC237C
Without CONSULT-II
1. After warming up engine, run it at idle speed.
2. Shift selector lever to “D” range while depressing the brake pedal and pulling the parking brake control lever.
3. Disconnect front or rear electronic controlled engine mount harness connector when engine speed is more than 1,000
rpm.
SEF285X
4. When returning engine speed to idle speed, check that the body vibration increases, compared with the condition of the
above step 2 (With vehicle stopped).
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-541
2 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect front or rear electronic controlled engine mount harness connector.
3. Check voltage between electronic controlled engine mount terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF899X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+15A fuse
+Harness for open or short between electronic controlled engine mount and battery
©Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 and electronic controlled engine mount terminal 1, ECM terminal
50 and electronic controlled engine mount terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 5.
NG ©Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
5 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Visually check front and rear electronic controlled engine mount.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©Replace front or rear engine mount assembly.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-542
SEF286X
Component Description
NFEC0398
The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and
adjust for the increased load.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
NFEC0399
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PW/ST SIGNAL +Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Steering wheel in neutral position
(forward direction) OFF
The steering wheel is fully turned. ON
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Component Description
EC-543
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0401
MEC931C
SEF641XB
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
EC-544
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0402
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 2.
No ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check “PW/ST SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
SEF311Y
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 47 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF363X
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 4.
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-545
4 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector.
SEF286X
3. Check harness continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F17, E8 (RHD models)
+Harness for open or short between power steering oil pressure switch and body ground
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 47 and power steering oil pressure switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors F17, E8 (RHD models)
+Harness for open or short between power steering oil pressure switch and ECM
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-546
8 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine.
2. Check continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
SEF364X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace power steering oil pressure switch.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-547
SEF287X
Description
NFEC0636
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan sys-
tem.
SEF099X
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Description
EC-548
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0637
MEC868C
SEF643XC
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-549
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0638
1 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 81 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC014C
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 2.
2 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
SEF287X
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF618X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 4.
NG ©GO TO 3.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-550
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E15, F18
+Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
©Repair harness or connectors.
4 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E8, F17
+Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
+Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission control module) and refrigerant pressure sensor
©Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 81 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 8.
NG ©GO TO 7.
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E8, F17
+Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to HA-82, “Refrigerant pressure sensor”.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 9.
NG ©Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-551
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0604
LHD MODELS
NFEC0604S01
MEC932C
SEF642XB
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram
EC-552
RHD MODELS
NFEC0604S02
MEC010D
SEF642XB
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
EC-553
Diagnostic Procedure
NFEC0605
1 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 52 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF610X
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 2.
NG ©GO TO 3.
2 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 52 and ground under the following conditions.
SEF611XA
OK or NG
OK ©INSPECTION END
NG ©GO TO 7.
3 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the rear window defogger switch.
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up?
YesorNo
Yes ©GO TO 4.
No ©Refer to EL-174, “Rear Window Defogger”.
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
EC-554
4 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and rear window defogger relay terminal 5.
SEF002Y
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 6.
NG ©GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors B1, M5
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Diode M35
+Harness for open and short between ECM and rear window defogger relay
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
7 CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch “ON” at 2nd position with high beam.
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK (Models with con-
ventional type head-
lamp)
©GO TO 8.
OK (Models with xenon
type headlamp)
©GO TO 10.
NG ©Refer to EL-41, EL-47, “System Description”.
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-555
8 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect daytime light control unit harness connector (Models with daytime light system), dimmer relay (Models with-
out daytime light system).
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and daytime light control unit terminal 4 or dimmer relay terminal 5
(LHD models), 7 (RHD models) under the following conditions.
SEF368Z
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©GO TO 9.
9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E81, M15
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Diode E79
+Harness for open and short between ECM and headlamp RH relay or dimmer relay
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect headlamp RH relay (LHD models), headlamp LH relay (RHD models).
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and headlamp RH relay terminal or headlamp LH relay terminal 5
under the following conditions.
SEF369Z
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK ©GO TO 12.
NG ©GO TO 11.
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-556
11 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
+Harness connectors E81, M15
+Harness connectors M46, F44
+Diode E79
+Harness for open and short between ECM and headlamp RH relay or headlamp LH relay
©Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-126.
©INSPECTION END
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
EC-557
Wiring Diagram
NFEC0407
MEC214D
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS
Wiring Diagram
EC-558
Fuel Pressure Regulator
NFEC0408
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (bar, kg/cm
2
, psi)
Vacuum hose is connected. Approximately 235 (2.35, 2.4, 34)
Vacuum hose is disconnected. Approximately 294 (2.94, 3.0, 43)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
NFEC0409
Target idle speed*1
No-load*2 (in “P” or N” position)
M/T: 625±50 rpm (VQ30DE)
M/T: 675±50 rpm (VQ20DE)
A/T: 700±50 rpm
Air conditioner: ON In “P” or N” position 825 rpm or more
Ignition timing*1 In “P” or N” position 9°±5° BTDC (VQ20DE)
15°±5° BTDC (VQ30DE)
Throttle position sensor idle position 0.15 - 0.85V
*1: Throttle position sensor harness connector connected
*2: Under the following conditions:
+Air conditioner switch: OFF
+Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
+Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Mass Air Flow Sensor
NFEC0411
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14)V
Output voltage at idle 1.2 - 1.8*V
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II) 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
NFEC0412
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (front)
NFEC0414
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω
Fuel Pump
NFEC0415
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 0.2 - 5.0Ω
IACV-AAC Valve
NFEC0416
Resistance [at 20°C (77°F)] Approximately 22Ω
Injector
NFEC0417
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 14-15Ω
Resistor
NFEC0418
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 2.2 kΩ
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure Regulator
EC-559
Throttle Position Sensor
NFEC0419
Throttle valve conditions
Voltage
(at normal operating temperature, engine off, ignition switch ON,
throttle opener disengaged)
Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85V
Partially open Between (a) and (b)
Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7V
Calculated Load Value
NFEC0420
Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II)
At idle 14.0 - 33.0
At 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
NFEC0421
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater (rear)
NFEC0422
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω
Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF)
NFEC0423
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 470 - 570Ω
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
NFEC0424
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
NFEC0639
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] HITACHI make 1,440 - 7,760Ω
MITSUBISHI make 2,090 - 2,550Ω
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Throttle Position Sensor
EC-560

Navigation menu